Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Report
RCPVI:1) 9 ,) PROJECT MANUAL FORF Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project I Tigard-Tualatin School District 6960 SW Sandburg Street Tigard, OR 97223 Vop 2 c,(• Op cz City of Tigard 1 Appoved Plans ( 1 Bid Set BY Date kLE111-, May 13, 2013 CJOtMt OFFICE COPY IBI GROUP 1 Dull Olson Weekes - IBI Group Architects Inc. SET NO . 1 1 PROJECT MANUAL 1 FOR: 1 Fowler MS 1 Cooler/Freezer Replacement ' P or ect � 1 for 1 (OWNER) 1 Tigard-Tualatin School District 6960 SW Sandburg Street 1 Tigard, OR 97223 (ARCHITECT) Dull Olson Weekes - IBI Group Architects ' 907 SW Stark Street Portland, OR 97205 1 PH: 503 226-6950 / FAX: 503 273-9192 c > 2282 ' ; .TEV ,©N •1 ' May 13, 2013 I I TABLE OF CONTENTS I TABLE OF CONTENTS I PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 00—PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders I Substitution Request Form 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 52 00 Agreement Form I AIA Document A101 -2007"Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum" 00 72 00 General Conditions I Modified AIA Document A201 -2007 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" 00 73 40 Public Contracting I SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 --GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary I 01 13 31 Certificate of Compliance 01 13 32 Certificate of No Hazardous Materials 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures I 01 26 00 01 30 00 Contract Modification Procedures Administrative Requirements 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation al 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 Definitions 01 45 05 Field Engineering I 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements Substitution Request(After the Bidding Phase) 01 70 00 Execution • I 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures I 01 78 00 01 79 00 Closeout Submittals Demonstration and Training DIVISION 02--EXISTING CONDITIONS I02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition DIVISION 03—CONCRETE • 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete I 03 30 53 Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 04--MASONRY(NOT USED) DIVISION 05-- METALS(NOT USED) IDIVISION 06—WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry • I DIVISION 07--THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 51 00 Built-Up Bituminous Roofing I 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim DIVISION 08--OPENINGS (NOT USED) I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project Page- 1 Printed 5/6/2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 09— FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 90 00 Painting and Coating DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES 10 26 01 Wall and Corner Guards ' DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment DIVISION 12--FURNISHINGS(NOT USED) DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14--CONVEYING EQUIPMENT(NOT USED) DIVISION 21 --FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT USED) DIVISION 22—PLUMBING 22.05 00 Plumbing Materials and Methods 22 07 00 Plumbing insulation 22 10 00 Plumbing Piping DIVISION 23--HEATING,VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)(NOT USED) ' DIVISION 26--ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods DIVISION 27—COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED) DIVISION 28—ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY(NOT USED) DIVISION 31 —EARTHWORK 111 31 20 00 Earth Moving DIVISION 32--EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS(NOT USED) DIVISION 33—UTILITIES 33 41 00 Storm Utility Drainage Piping 33 46 00 Subdrainage END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project Page-2 Punted 5/6/2013 DOCUMENT 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DOCUMENT 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUMMARY 1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES ' A. Invitation 1. Bid Submission 2. Intent ' 3. Work Identified in the Contract Documents • 4. Contract Time B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents 1. Definitions 2. Contract Documents Identification 3. Availability 4. Examination 5. Inquiries/Addenda 6. Product/Assembly/System Substitutions C. Site Assessment ' 1. Site Examination 2. Prebid Conference D. Qualifications 1. Evidence of Qualifications 2. Subcontractors/Suppliers/Others E. Bid Submission 1. Submission Procedure 2. Bid Ineligibility ' F. Bid Enclosures/Requirements 1. Security Deposit 2. Performance Assurance 3. Bid Form Requirements ' 4. Bid Form Signature G. Offer Acceptance/Rejection 1. Duration of Offer ' 2. Acceptance of Offer H. Notice/Protest of Award 1. Notice of Award 2. Protest of Award • 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Document 00 41 00- Bid Form. INVITATION 2.01 BID SUBMISSION ' A. Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the Owner at 6900 SW Sandburg Street, Tigard, OR 97223 before 2:00 p.m. local standard time on the 6th day of June, 2013. B. Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened. C. Offers will be opened publicly immediately after the time for receipt of bids. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District ' May 2013 Printed 5/7/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 21 13- 1 DOCUMENT 00 21 13 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2.02 INTENT , A. The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete a Cooler/Freezer Replacement located at 10865 SW Walnut Street, Tigard, OR 97223 for a Stipulated Sum contract, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.03 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this proposed Contract comprises remodeling, demolition, and roof repair, including • electrical and plumbing Work. 2.04 CONTRACT TIME A. The Project Schedule is as follow: , 1. Open Bids/Notice of Intent to Award: June 6, 2013 2. Anticipate Contractor Notice to Proceed: June 17, 2013 3. Substantial Completion: August 22, 2013 I 4. Final Completion: September 5, 2013 B. The bidder, in submitting an offer, accepts the Contract Time period stated for performing the Work. 111 ' BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.01 DEFINITIONS A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Form. ' B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda. C. Bid, Offer, or Bidding:Act of submitting an offer under seal. D. Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form. 3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION A. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 13013, as prepared by Dull Olson Weekes- lBl Group Architects who is located at 907 SW Stark Street, Portland, OR 97205, and with contents as identified in the Table of Contents of the Project Manual and Title Sheet of the Drawings. 3.03 AVAILABILITY A. Sets of Bid Documents may be obtained at Precision Images; 900 SE Sandy Boulevard, Portland, OR 97214; (503 274-2030). A refundable deposit of$50 is required for a single set of plans and specifications for a select group of general contractors by invitation only. Documents are also available electronically from Precision Images. No partial sets will be provided. Neither the Owner nor Architect will be responsible for bids based on incomplete sets of Documents. B. Deposit will be refunded if Bid Documents are returned complete, undamaged, unmarked and reusable, within 7 days of bid submission. Failure to comply will result in forfeiture of deposit. C. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes. 3.04 EXAMINATION A. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the documents be incomplete. B. Immediately notify Architect, via email upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents. Point of contact with the Architect is identified in the Inquiries/Addenda Paragraph. Phone calls are not permitted. 3.05 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA A. Direct questions to Rebecca Stuecker, email: rebecca.stuecker@dowa-ibigroup.com. B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period.All Addenda become part of the Contract Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. C. Verbal answers are not binding on any party. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 21 13 -2 Pnnted 51712013 , DOCUMENT 00 21 13 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for receipt of bids.The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to known recipients and plan centers. E. An issue that could have been, but is not, addressed through an inquiry or request for clarification is not grounds for a protest of award. ' 3.06 PRODUCT/ASSEMBLY/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to ' 10 days before receipt of bids. B. When a request to substitute a product is made, Architect may approve the substitution and will issue an Addendum to known bidders. ' C. The submission shall provide sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products. D. Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each proposed substitution. I E. Provide products as specified unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and accepted. F. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements for additional requirements. SITE ASSESSMENT 4.01 SITE EXAMINATION A. Examine the project site before submitting a bid. ' B. A visit to the site has been arranged for bidders following the prebid Conference. 4.02 PREBID CONFERENCE A. A mandatory prebid conference has been scheduled for 4:00.p.m. on the 22nd day of May at the location of 10865 SW Walnut Street, Tigard, OR 97223. B. All general contract bidders and suppliers are invited. C. Representatives of Architect will be in attendance. ' D. Summarized minutes of this meeting will be circulated to attendees. These minutes will not form part of the Contract Documents. E. Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum, issued to Bid Document recipients. QUALIFICATIONS 5.01 EVIDENCE OF QUALIFICATIONS ' A. To demonstrate qualification for performing the Work of this Contract, bidders may be requested to submit written evidence of financial position, license to perform work in the State. ' 5.02 SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS/OTHERS A. Owner reserves the right to reject a proposed subcontractor for reasonable cause. B. Refer to General Conditions. ' BID SUBMISSION 6.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE • A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. B. Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed and sealed with the required security in a closed opaque envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project ' name and Owner's name on the outside. C. Address the Bid to Machelle Stephens, Purchasing Agent of Tigard-Tualatin School District, at the Business Office,Tigard-Tualatin School District No. 23J, 6960 SW Sandburg Street, Tigard, ' Oregon 97223. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 21 13 -3 Printed 5/7/2013 DOCUMENT 00 21 13 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 6.02 BID INELIGIBILITY A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the Owner, be declared unacceptable. B. Bid Forms,Appendices, and enclosures that are improperly prepared may, at the discretion of Owner, be declared unacceptable. C. Failure to provide security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may, at the discretion of Owner, be waived. BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS 7.01 SECURITY DEPOSIT A. No bid security deposit or bid security bond is required. 7.02 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE , A. Accepted Bidder: Provide a Performance and Payment bond as described in the General Conditions. B. Include the cost of performance assurance bonds in the Bid Amount. 7.03 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS A. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices. 7.04 BID FORM SIGNATURE A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows: 1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor"under the signature.Affix seal. 2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature. 3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s)in their normal signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature.Affix the corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with the Bid Form in the bid envelope. 4. Joint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid Form under their respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the requirements of a Partnership. OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION 8.01 DURATION OF OFFER A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of thirty(30)days after the bid closing date. 8.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER A. After acceptance by Owner, Architect on behalf of Owner,will issue to the successful bidder, a written Bid Acceptance. NOTICE/PROTEST OF AWARD 9.01 NOTICE OF AWARD A. The District shall mail a written notice of award to all Bidders.The written notice of award of the contract shall constitute a final decision of the District to award the contract if no written protest of the notice of award is within seven(7)calendar days of the notice of award is mailed. If a protest is timely filed, the notice of award is a final decision of the District only upon issuance of a written decision denying the protest and affirming the award.The notice of award and any written decision denying or approving a protest shall be sent to every Bidder. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 21 13 -4 Punted 5/7/2013 DOCUMENT 00 21 13 IINSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 9.02 PROTEST OF AWARD ' A. Any actual Bidder who is adversely affected or aggrieved by the District's notice of award of the contract to another Bidder on the same solicitation shall have seven (7)calendar days after the date of notice of award to submit to the District a written protest of the notice of award.The District shall not entertain a protest submitted after the time period established in this provision. A Bidder is "adversely affected or aggrieved"only if the Bidder is eligible for award of the contract as the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive bid and is next in line for award, i.e., the protester must claim that all lower Bidders are ineligible for award because the bids are nonresponsive; or because The District committed a substantial violation of a provision in the Bidding Documents or of an applicable procurement statute or rule, and the protesting Bidder was unfairly evaluated and would have, but for such substantial violation, been the responsible Bidder offering the lowest bid. B. Bidders must submit written protest of award to Machelle Stephens, Purchasing Agent of Tigard-Tualatin School District, at the Business Office, Tigard-Tualatin School District No. 23J, 6960 SW Sandburg Street, Tigard, OR 97223.The written protest must specify the grounds ' upon which the protest is based.An issue that could have been, but was not, raised as a request for clarification or protest of a specification pursuant to these instructions shall not be grounds for a protest of award. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS M 1 I • 1 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District ' May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 21 13- 5 Footed 5/7/2013 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO: Dull Olson Weekes- IBI Group Architects Inc. ' 907 SW Stark Street Portland, OR 97205 PROJECT: Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project We hereby submit for your consideration the Product described below as a substitute for the specified product indicated: ' 1. Specified Product: ' Name: Section: Paragraph: 2. Proposed Substitution: a. Brand Name: b. Model/Catalog No.: ' c. Manufacturer: (Name) • 111 (Address) (Zip) (Telephone) d. Nearest Distributor: ' (Name) ' (Address) (Zip) (Telephone) e. Substitute product effects adjacent Work in the following way: 1 ' 3. Supporting Data: a. Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the ' data are clearly identified. b. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents which proposed ' substitution will require for its proper installation. 4. Certification: ' The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct: ' a. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District ' May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project Page - 1 Printed 5/6/2013 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST RE F ' ORM b. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. c. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. d. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. ' e. The function, appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. 5. Submitted By: Firm: , (Name) (Address) (Zip) (Telephone) By: Title: (Please type or print) Signature: i 6. Acceptance/Rejection: Acceptable substitution items will be covered by an Addendum issued to all Bidders. 7. Architects Action: The following is for use by the Architect: ' Accepted _ Accepted with exceptions as noted Not Accepted _ Received after deadline Remarks: 111 By: Date: For: Dull Olson Weekes- IBI Group Architects Inc. END OF FORM ' 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project Page-2 Printed 5/6/2013 I DOCUMENT 00 41 00 IBID FORM PROPOSAL I FOR FOWLER MS COOLER/FREEZER REPLACEMENT PROJECT I Tigard-Tualatin School District Tigard, Oregon I IDate: ' TO: ITigard-Tualatin School District 6960 SW Sandburg Street Tigard, OR 97223 FROM: I I Dear Sir: illHaving carefully examined the Project Manual entitled "Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project" to be located at 10865 S. W. Walnut Street, Tigard, OR 97223, and the Drawings, similarly titled, as well I as the premises and conditions affecting the work, the Undersigned states he has the personnel and means to complete the work and proposes to furnish all labor and materials and to perform all work required by and in strict accordance with the above named documents for the following sums: I 1.01 BASE BID For the Base Bid, as defined in the Project Manual and Drawings, the sum of: I DOLLARS($ ) I1.02 TIME OF COMPLETION I The Undersigned agrees to complete the work within the number of calendar days as stipulated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and the Instruction to Bidders. I The schedule below contains certain specific dates. These dates shall be adhered to and are the last acceptable dates, unless modified by mutual agreement between Contractor and the Owner. All dates indicated at midnight, unless otherwise stipulated. The only exceptions to this schedule are defined in the A201-2007 General Conditions. IOpen Bids/Notice of Intent to Award: June 6, 2013 Anticipated Contractor Notice to Proceed: June 17, 2013 I Substantial Completion: August 22, 2013 Final Completion: September 5, 2013 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District ' May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 41 00- 1 Printed 5/6/2013 DOCUMENT 00 41 00 BID FORM 1.03 CONTRACT&BONDS Should the Undersigned be notified of the acceptance of this bid within 30 days after the time set for opening bids, he agrees to execute a contract for the above work, for a compensation computed from the above sums, and to furnish certificate of insurance and performance, labor and material payment and maintenance bonds as required by the Project Manual. 1.04 RESIDENCY Pursuant to ORS 279C.365, bidder(check one)is lis not a resident bidder. If not, indicate State of residency 1.10 ADDENDA Receipt of the following Addenda to the Contract Documents is acknowledged. , Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date , Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date 1.11 LEGAL STATUS OF BIDDER , (Signature of Bidder) By (Name) 111 (Title) ' (Legal name of person, firm or corporation) (Business Address) (City, State, Zip) ' (Telephone Number) The names of the president, treasurer and manager of the bidding corporation, or the names and ' residences of all persons and parties interested in this proposal as partners or principals are as follows: i State of Oregon Contractor's License No. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 41 00-2 Printed 5/6/2013 1 DOCUMENT 00 41 00 ' BID FORM 1.12 STATE PROVISIONS The Undersigned certifies as follows: The Undersigned is licensed with the State of Oregon Construction Contractors Board (CCB)prior to bidding on Public Improvement Contract(s). FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL RESULT IN BID REJECTION. ' CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS BOARD REGISTRATION NO.: EXPIRATION DATE OF CCB NO.: The Undersigned has not and will not discriminate against a subcontractor in the awarding of a subcontract because the subcontractor is a minority, women, or emerging small business enterprise certified under ORS 200.055. The undersigned agrees to be bound by and will comply with the federal Davis-Bacon Act(40 U.S.C. 3141 et seq.)and the State Oregon Prevailing Wage Law(ORS 279C.838 and 279C.840). Contractor and any subcontractors must pay the higher of the federal prevailing wage rate or the ' state prevailing wage, as determined by the Director of Bureau of Labor and Industries("BOLI"). The applicable prevailing wage rates are those rates as set forth in the January 1, 2011, Bureau of Labor and Industries Publication"Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts subject to BOTH the State PWR and Federal Davis Bacon Act(including amendments)"Suth publication can be reviewed electronically at htto://www.boli.state.or.us/BOLI/WHD/PWR/owr db2.shtml and is hereby incorporated as part of the Contract Documents. 1110 Respectfully submitted this date of , 20_ Firm Name: Address: City, State, Zip: ' Signature: Name(type): ' END OF SECTION ' Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 41 00 -3 Printed 5/6/2013 1 SECTION 00 52 00 AGREEMENT FORM SECTION 00 52 00 IAGREEMENT FORM PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 FORM OF AGREEMENT A. AIA Document A101 -2007"Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum"will form the basis of the Owner/Contractor 1 Agreement. 1. A copy is attached following this Document. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Section 00 72 00-General Conditions. B. Section 01 42 16-Definitions. PART 2 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 1 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF AGREEMENT 1 1 M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District 1 May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 52 00- 1 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 00 72 00 ' GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Modified AIA Document A201 -2007"General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"will be the General Conditions for the Project. 1. A copy is attached following this Document. ' 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 42 16-Definitions. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF DOCUMENT 1 1 III Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 72 00- 1 Pooled 517/2013 SECTION 00 73 40 PUBLIC CONTRACTING SECTION 00 73 40 IPUBLIC CONTRACTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Prevailing Wage Requirements(PWR)-ORS 279C.830 to.870 and Davis-Bacon 40 U.S.C. 3141 et seq. B. Prevailing Wage Rate Fee-BOLI -ORS 279C.825. C. Public Works Bond (Contractors)- BOLI -ORS 279C.830(2)(a). D. Public Works Bond (Subcontractors)- BOLI -ORS 279C.830(2)(b). I'I , E. Certified statements-ORS 279C.845. F. Withholdings for lack of payment-ORS 279C.515. G. Written notice of working hours-ORS 279C.520. H. Payment for medical services-ORS 279C.530. I. Ineligible to hold public works contracts-ORS 279C.860. J. Registration with Oregon Construction Contractors Board -ORS 701.021. K. Payment for daily, weekly, weekend, and holiday overtime-ORS 279C.540. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. None 1.03 PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS(PWR)-ORS 279C.830 TO.870 11 A. The Work described in the Contract Documents is subject to State of Oregon Prevailing Wage Rates in effect at the time the Guarantee Maximum Price is established in accordance with ORS 279C.800-870 and Davis-Bacon Act(40 U.S.C. 3141 et seq. Ensure all workers are paid in accordance with applicable wage rates and be solely responsible for unpaid prevailing wages. B. The applicable prevailing wage rate requirements are as follows; 1. April 1, 2013 Prevailing Wage Rates Amendment. 2. April 1, 2013 PWR Apprenticeship Rates. 3. January 1, 2012 Definitions of Covered Occupations for Public Works Contracts in Oregon. 4. Davis-Bacon/BOLI Combined (2013 Projects). C. Current rates can be found at the following location: 1. http://www.oregon.gov/boli/WHD/PWR/Pages/pwr_oregon_2013.aspx. 2. http://www.oregon.gov/ODOT/hwy/specs/Pages/wages.aspx#Davis-Bacon/ I BOLI_combined_(2013_Projects). 1.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATE FEE-ORS 279C.825 A. Owner shall pay the prevailing wage rate fee required to be paid to the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries as provided in ORS 279C.825. 1.05 PUBLIC WORKS BONDS (CONTRACTORS)-ORS 279C.830(2)(A) A. Contractor must have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board before starting work on the project, unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8)or(9). 1.06 PUBLIC WORKS BONDS(SUBCONTRACTORS)-ORS 279C.830(2)(B) A. Include in every subcontract a provision requiring the subcontractor to have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board before starting work on the project, unless exempt under ORS 279C.836 (4), (7), (8)or(9). Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Pnnted 5/8/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 73 40 - 1 1 SECTION 00 73 40 PUBLIC CONTRACTING 1.07 CERTIFIED STATEMENTS-ORS 279.845 A. The contractor or the contractor's surety and every subcontractor or the subcontractor's surety shall file certified statements with the public agency in writing in accordance with ORS 279.845. 1.08 WITHHOLDING FOR LACK OF PAYMENT-ORS 279C.515 A. Should the Contractor fail, neglect or refuse to make prompt payment of any claim for labor or services furnished to the Contractor or a Subcontractor by any person in connection with the Work as the claim becomes due, the Owner may pay such claim to the person furnishing the labor or services and charge the amount of the payment against funds due or to become due the Contractor. 1.09 WRITTEN NOTICE OF WORKING HOURS-ORS 279C.520 A. Include in every subcontract that a person may not be employed for more than 10 hours in any one day, or 40 hours in any one week, except in cases of necessity, emergency or when the public policy absolutely requires it(in which case the employee shall be paid at least time and a half pay)unless otherwise permitted by law. 1.10 PAYMENT FOR MEDICAL SERVICES-ORS 279C.530 A. Promptly, as due, make payment to any person, co-partnership, association or corporation furnishing medical, surgical and hospital care services or other needed care and attention, incident to sickness or injury, to the employees of the contractor, of all sums that the contractor agrees to pay for the services and all moneys and sums that the contractor collected or deducted from the wages of employees under any law, contract or agreement for the purpose of providing or paying for the services. B. Ensure all subject employers working on the Project are either employers that will comply with ORS 656.017 or employers that are exempt under ORS 656.126. 1.11 INELIGIBLE TO HOLD PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS-ORS 279C.860 A. Contractor shall not be disbarred from holding public works contracts in the State of Oregon in accordance with ORS 279C.860. 1.12 REGISTRATION WITH OREGON CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS BOARD-ORS 701.021 A. Contractor must be registered with the State of Oregon Construction Contractors Board, pursuant to ORS 701.021. 1.13 PAYMENT FOR DAILY,WEEKLY,WEEKEND AND HOLIDAY OVERTIME-ORS 279C.540; ORS 279C.520(1); OAR 839-025-0020(2)(B) A. Contractor must pay daily, weekly, weekend and holiday overtime as required by ORS 279C.540, ORS 279C.520(1); OAR 839-025-0020(2)(b). PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 00 73 40 -2 Printed 5/8/2013 I SECTION 01 10 00 ISUMMARY SECTION 01 10 00 1 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. General Requirements. B. Work Covered by Contract Documents. • C. Contractor Use of Premises. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. TIME OF COMPLETION I 1. The work of this Contract shall be commenced on the date of written notice to proceed and shall be completed by the dates established in the Owner/Contractor Agreement, and as stipulated in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. I B. ASBESTOS FREE CERTIFICATION 1. Absolutely no materials containing asbestos are to be furnished or installed as part of this Project. Ensure that no subcontractor or any of the Contractor's own forces installs any I materials containing asbestos.At final closeout of the Project, provide to the Owner certification that no materials containing asbestos have been installed in the Project, and that the Project is asbestos-free as required by the State of Oregon. I C. COORDINATION 1. The Contractor is responsible for overall coordination of the Project. 2. The Drawings and Specifications are arranged for convenience only and do not necessarily determine which trades perform the various portions of the Work. 1 ii3. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate agreed-upon Owner occupancy. AP 4. Perform all necessary work to receive and/or join the work of all trades. 5. Verify location of existing utilities and protect from damage. I D. PERMITS AND FEES 1. The Owner will be responsible for filing and paying for building permits and all fees associated with the building permit, system development charges, impact fees, etc. The I Contractor will be responsible for picking up all Project permits and will have full responsibility for requirements of and payments for all trade permits (i.e. electrical, plumbing, mechanical). I E. REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTORS, AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS 1. Ensure that all persons performing the Work comply with Owner's tobacco policy. Copies made available upon request. 2. Contractor and Subcontractors shall refrain from contact with staff and students at all I times. 3. Neither the Contractor nor any of its Subcontractors of any tier shall utilize any employee at the site who has pled guilty to or been convicted of any felony crime involving the I physical neglect of a child, physical injury to or death of a child, sexual offenses against or sexual exploitation of a child, child prostitution, or other similar offenses as defined by the most current State Statutes, or similar laws of another jurisdiction. Remove from the work and work site any employee who has engaged in such actions, or who the Owner I reasonable considers objectionable. 4. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, ensure by appropriate provision in each subcontract agreement that the Contractor may remove from the work and work site any I Subcontractor or Subcontractor's employee who has engaged in such action. At no change to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, remove from the work and work site any employee or other person pursuant to this Section. Failure to comply with these requirements is grounds for immediate termination of the Agreement for cause. I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Rooted 5113!2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 10 00 - 1 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises all required cooler/freezer replacement, on-site and earthwork construction, general renovation construction, plumbing, and electrical work for the Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project located at 10865 SW Walnut Street, Tigard, OR 97223. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Work Sequence: 1. Perform Work in a manner required to accommodate School District use of premises during the Contract Period. Coordinate Work schedules and operations with Owner's use requirements. 2. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: a. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 3. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. B. Limitations on Use: 1. Owner intends to occupy and conduct school in the existing building during portions of the construction period. The existing building during times of Owner occupancy is a limited Contractor access area. Coordinate access to the existing building. 2. Complete and exclusive use of the construction area except as outlined above will be permitted from Notice to Proceed until Substantial Completion of the Project. Coordinate areas available for early occupancy(if any)with Owner. 3. During times of Owner's occupancy there may be down days during the Contract Period when occupied areas will be closed. Request from the District a'list of down days that may occur during the Contract Period. Notify the District at least 48 hours in advance of down days during which time the Contractor intends to work.The District will pay for employee time during such down days when the building is required to be open for Contractor use. C. Non-Interference with School: 1. Perform work operations upon areas adjacent to existing Owner-occupied areas and/or structures in such manner as to not interfere with continued free and comfortable use of such areas. 2. Keep building exits safe, protected, and restricted from remainder of construction site and clear of obstructions at all times. If closure of an exit is required by the Work, notify the school Principal and allow ample time for an alternate exit plan to be executed. D. Non-Interference with Serving Utilities: 1. Do not interrupt electric, gas,water, or other services to existing Owner-occupied structures without prior notice to the District and then only at a definite time and for a definite duration approved by Owner. 2. Schedule demolition, remodel, and new construction to accommodate Owner's continued use of existing and/or new mechanical, electrical, and plumbing services as required for Owner's continued occupancy and beneficial use of designated areas. 3. Consult with public and private utility companies for location and extent of all utilities before commencing work. 4. Provide services of a utilities locator to investigate and mark underground utilities in the vicinity of exterior work; and for interior below-slab utilities in areas which will be partially demolished prior to commencing work. Ensure that utilities are identified prior to saw cutting interior floor slabs. 5. Provide all services required. Protect and maintain existing utilities, active electrical conductors, sewers, pipes, and other active lines either on project site or in offsite street excavations. 6. Arrange for and pay cost of disconnecting, removing, relocating, capping, replacing, or abandoning of public and private utilities in the way of construction operations in accordance with serving utilities policies, local regulations and governing codes. Utilities, Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 10 00 -2 Pnnted 5/13/2013 I SECTION 01 10 00 ' SUMMARY pipes, sewers, electrical conductors and the like to be abandoned shall be capped in ' accordance with instructions of governing authority or as directed. E. Protections - Exterior Components: 1. Protect sidewalks, asphalt paving, concrete, plantings, and lawn areas at all times from ' spillage of materials used in carrying out the Work. Exercise care to preclude materials from clogging catch basins and yard drains. Leave all drainage items clean and in proper working condition. 2. Clean, repair, resurface, or restore existing surfaces to their original condition, or completely replace such surfaces to match existing where damaged by construction operations. 3. Whenever it is necessary to cut and remove fences and/or power lines(whether on private or public property), restore such demolished work to condition at minimum equal to that which existed prior to such demolition. 4. Damage to property adjacent to Owner's property shall be restored to the satisfaction of respective oprts F. Protections- InteriorpreComponents:yowner . 1. Contractor is responsible for protection of completed portions of the Work. Provide protection as required such that items are not soiled or damaged during the progression of the Work. Maintain all such protections for the entire duration of the construction until acceptance by Owner. 2. Whenever it is required and/or necessary to demolish portions of work,take all ' precautions to protect adjacent portions of the work which remain fro m damage. 3. Clean, repair, resurface, or restore such items above required to be protected to their original condition, or completely replace items to match existing undamaged portions of work, where damaged by construction operations. G. Protections: Vegetation and Plantings: 1. Protect all existing trees to remain on-site from foliage, trunk, branch, and root damage. 2. Provide barricades and maintain same around all trees, plantings, and other landscaped areas adjacent to work of this Contract to protect such areas from damage of any nature caused by construction operations. 3. Replace any plantings damaged or destroyed with plants of equivalent type, size, quantity, I and nature as approved by Architect. H. Security: 1. Provide security and facilities to protect the Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism,and theft. 2. Provide temporary barriers, doors, and locks at all openings. 3. Coordinate with Owner's building security provider and program. ' I. Removal of Equipment and Materials: 1. Clear site and surrounding street areas of all equipment, apparatus, appliances, tools, unused materials, and similar items immediately as they cease to be necessary to carry out the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION • 1 1 ' Protect No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 10 00 - 3 Pnnted 5/13/2013 1 SECTION 01 13 31 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE SECTION 01 13 31 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE No final payment shall be made until the contractor provides to the owner, prior to acceptance of the work, a notarized certification of compliance in following form: The Contractor does hereby certify that all work has been performed and materials supplied in ' accordance with the drawings, specifications and Contract Documents for the above Work, and that: No less than the prevailing rates of wages as ascertained by the governing body of the Contracting agency has been paid to laborers, workmen and mechanics employed on this Work; ' There have been no unauthorized substitutes of Subcontractors; nor have any subcontracts been entered into without the names of the Subcontractors having been submitted to the Owner prior to the start of such subcontracted work; 1 No subcontract was assigned or transferred or performed by any Subcontractor other than the original Subcontractor, without prior notice having been submitted to the Owner together with 1 the names of all Subcontractors; All claims for material and labor and other service performed in connection with these specifications have been paid; In WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument this day of Firm Name: Signature: 1 Title: Attest (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ' As determined necessary, evidence of compliance may be required to be submitted with and made a part of this Certificate of Compliance. END OF SECTION 1 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District 1 May 20131Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 13 31 - 1 SECTION 01 13 32 1 CERTIFICATE OF NO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SECTION 01 13 32 ICERTIFICATE OF NO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS No final payment shall be made until the Contractor shall file with the Owner, prior to acceptance of the work, a notarized certificate of no hazardous materials in the following form: "To the best of myknowledge no hazardous material, including, but not limited to: asbestos, 9 9 polychlorinated biphenyls(pcb's)and lead based products, is used in the construction of this project. I Material safety data sheets will be provided as requested by the Owner for all materials which may be questioned in the future." In WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument this I day of , IFirm name: • ISignature: ITitle: I I I I IAttest: (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) I As determined necessary, evidence of compliance may be required to be submitted with and made a part of this certificate. IEND OF SECTION I I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District I May 2013/2013 00113 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 13 32 - 1 I SECTION 01 20 00 1 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 20 00 1 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. I 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. AIA Document A201 -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Progress Payments and Final Payment. IB. Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures: Substantial Completion and Final Payment. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES I A. Form to be used:AIA G703 Continuation Sheets. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Submit Schedule of Values at times indicated in Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements. I E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization and bonds and insurance. Provide closeout and punchlist line items. I F. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the cost into: 1. The cost of materials (only), delivered and unloaded, with taxes and the like, paid. 2. Remainder of installed value(labor, temporary facilities/equipment needed, etc.). I 3. Failure to provide this breakdown prior to materials being delivered voids Contractors right to be paid for affected materials until they are installed. G. For each line item of installed value exceeding$20,000, show breakdown by major products or I operations under each item. H. Round-off figures to nearest dollar amount for the original breakdown only. .. I. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum. IJ. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders,with each Application For Payment. 1.04 SUBCONTRACTOR AND SUPPLIER LISTING II A. Subcontractor and Supplier Listing: Follow Project Manual Table of Contents as a format for listing name of Subcontractors, including lower-tier Subcontractors and suppliers. 1. Identify by section number and title the company, address, telephone number and contact I person. 2. Adjacent to Subcontractor list its lower-tier Subcontractor(s)and/or supplier(s). 1.05 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS r A. Submit a preliminary copy of the Payment Application to Architect for comment prior to formal submittal. B. Submit applications for payment in accordance with General Conditions 9.3 using specified I forms. C. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. D. Form to be used: AIA G702 -Application and Certificate for Payment. I E. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District I May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 20 00 - 1 Pnnted 5/8/2013 1 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES F. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. G. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. 1. Notarized Affidavit:After the first request for payment, each subsequent request shall be accompanied bynotarized affidavit statingthat all subcontractors have been paid less P earned retainage as their interests appeared in the last payment received. No application for payment by the Contractor shall be processed unless accompanied by such Contractor's affidavit. 2. In addition, the Owner may require that any requests for payment shall also be accompanied by a receipt with original signature from the Principal Subcontractors including Mechanical and Electrical, and others as required by the Owner, of the dollar amount they received for the previous month's work(less earned retention), and an affidavit by such Subcontractors stating that all sub-subcontractors, suppliers,wages, fringes, and taxes arising out of such subcontract have been paid in full as their interest appeared in the last payment received. H. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products. 1. For app licati n for stored materials include: a. Project. b. Application number and date. 1) Item number and identification as shown on application and description of specific material or product. 2) Material stored off-site: Record of quantities and bonding/insurance of storage facility. 3) Must be within 75 driving miles of the site and open to Architect's and Owner's inspections and inventory during regular business hours. I. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number, description and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. Provide a breakdown by major products or operation for amounts in excess of$20,000. J. Submit one electronic copy of each Application for Payment. K. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 32 00- Construction Progress Documentation. 2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 111 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. L. Current Record Documents: Prior to acting on processing each monthly request for payment, Contractor is required to present for review to Architect and consultants, a current set of record documents indicating any revisions. M. Certified Payroll Statements:Submit certified statements (payroll reports)for prevailing wage rates and for Davis-Bacon wages during the monthly billing cycle in compliance with ORS 279.845.Where such reports are not provided, that category of work will not be paid until appropriate documentation is filed. N. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.06 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF INITIAL PAYMENT A. Prior to initial payment, the Contractor must have delivered all required insurance, bonds and contracts; acceptable Schedule of Values, Sub-Contractors/Suppliers List, resumes of key personnel, Contractor Construction Schedule. 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 20 00-2 Pnnted 518/2013 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.07 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Price, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1. Submit Application for Final Payment at time indicated in Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements. B. All Project Closeout activities must be complete; all liens and claims settled; all project record documents transmitted in final approved form; record survey(if required)transmitted and recorded by the County; removal of temporary services,facilities and all debris/materials/ equipment and all other requirements of the General Conditions 9.10.All permit drawings, sign- off sheets and Certificates of Occupancy transmitted. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION • t 11/1 I I I I 1 I I r Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 20 00-3 Pnnted 5/8/2013 I SECTION 01 26 00 ICONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 26 00 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for processing contract modifications and Change Orders. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS I A. AIA Document A201 -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Governing requirements for changes in the Work, in Contract Cost, and Contract Time. B. Section 01 20 00-Price and Payment Procedures:Applications for payment and Schedule of Values. I C. Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance (O&M)data, warranties and bonds. I 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Submit name of individual authorized to accept changes, and to be responsible for informing Iothers in Contractor's employ of changes in the Work. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I A. No additional work shall be undertaken without Owner's and Architect's written approval. B. Written approval authorizing Contractor to undertake additional Work does not authorize automatic extension of Contract Completion time. II C. Coordinate related requirements specified in other parts of the Project Manual including, but not limited to, General Conditions,Article 7, Changes in the Work, as supplemented. 1.05 DEFINITIONS I A. Change Order(CO): This document signed by Owner, Contractor and Architect formally changes the Contract Sum or Contract Time and may incorporate Proposal Requests and/or Construction Change Directives. I B. Proposal Request(PR):This document initiated by the Architect is to be priced by the Contractor. Upon authorization by the Owner it becomes a directive to the Contractor to modify the scope of the Contract for inclusion in a future Change Order. Architect's Supplemental Instructions(ASI): This form is a written order comprising instructions IC. or interpretations, signed by Architect making minor changes in the Work not involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. If the Contractor considers that the ASI constitutes a Change in the Work, it must notify the Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. ID. Construction Change Directive(CCD): A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Owner and Architect, amending Contract Documents as described. This order directs Contractor to proceed with Work that may alter Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, and is intended to be I included in a subsequent Change Order pending agreement on changes in the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 1.06 SIGNATURES I A. All signatures shall be original; no photocopies. Facsimile signatures shall be followed immediately by mail and/or delivery of originals. 1.07 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES I A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time,Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. 1. Form for Minor Changes in the Work:Architect's "Architect's Supplemental Instructions" 1 form. I Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 26 00 - 1 Pnnted 5!7!2013 1 SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES , 2. If Contractor determines that an Architect's Supplemental Instruction involves adjustments to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor shall prepare and issue a Proposal Request to the Architect for approval prior to proceeding with the Architect's Supplemental Instruction. 1.08 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM AND CONTRACT TIME A. Maintain detailed records of work performed on a time and materials basis. Provide complete r information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation. C. Computation of Change in Contract Amount:As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. D. On request, provide additional data to support computations including: 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. I 3. Overhead and profit. 4. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. E. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work performed on a time and materials basis with the following information: 1. Origin and date of claim. 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time records and wage rates paid. 4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 1.09 PROPOSED CHANGE PROCEDURES A. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any111 overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 14 days. 1. Form for Proposal Requests: Architect's"Proposal Request"form. B. If latent or unforeseen condition require modifications to the Contract, or if an RFI response or an Architect's Supplemental Instruction is determined to have cost or schedule impacts, Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work,with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00. 1. Form for Proposal Requests:Architect's"Proposal Request"form. 1.10 APPROVAL OR REJECTION OF PROPOSAL A. When a proposed change is initiated through a Proposal Request: 1. Submit the following in writing within seven (7)days of date on Proposal Request: a. All direct and indirect costs. b. Schedule of Values and Unit Prices including basis for costs. c. Impact on other Work not described. Describe and include all direct and indirect costs of changes to other Work not specified in the PR. d. Quotation will be guaranteed for period specified in the PR beginning from signing of proposal, but, as a minimum, 30 days. If no period is specified, quotation shall be guaranteed for sixty(60)days from signing. e. Proposal shall be signed by authorized person. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 26 00-2 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES f. Failure of the Contractor to respond with pricing in a timely manner shall not be justification for claims by the Contractor of delay of the project associated with the Change. 2. Architect and Owner will review proposal and respond in writing by one of the following: a. Authorizing. b. Requesting additional information. c. Rejecting. 3. Authorization to proceed with Change through a recommendation by the Architect to the ' Owner and written authorization by the Owner directs Contractor to undertake Work. B. When Change is initiated by Contractor: 1. Architect and Owner review and respond in writing by one of the following: a. Processing a Change Order or Proposal. b. Requesting additional information. c. Rejecting. 2. If Owner responds by processing a Proposal Request,follow procedure outlined above. 3. If additional information is requested by Owner, respond in writing within seven days of Owner's request. 1.11 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS A. Support each lump sum proposal quotation and each unit price(not previously established) with detailed substantiating data. Clearly cross reference tracking numbers of CCDs, RFIs, PRs, etc. to allow easy identification of costs origins B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations: 1. Labor hours, number of workers, time cards and hourly rate cost justification 2. Equipment hours, make and model, number of pieces required, rental agreements and hourly rate justification. 3. Products required. a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. b. Quantities required. 4. Documented credit for Work deleted from Contract. 5. Justification citing specifics of critical path impacts per current CPM for any change in Contract Time. C. Support each claim for additional costs, and time-and-material/force account work with documentation, as required for lump-sum proposal. Include additional information: 1. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work, and date of order. 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom. 3. Time record, summary of hours worked and wage rates paid. 4. Receipts and invoices for: a. Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. b. Products used, listing of quantities. c. Subcontracts. 1.12 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. For changes that involve an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. 3. Form for Construction Change Directives: Architect's"Construction Change Directive" form. 1.13 FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Base upon Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation; or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Architect and Owner. 1 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 26 00 -3 Pnnted 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES B. Change Order describes Work changes, additions and deletions, with attachments of authorized Proposal Requests, agreed Construction Change Directives and/or previously agreed upon change pricing or Contract Time modifications. 111 C. Change Order provides accounting of any Contract Sum and Contract Time adjustment. 1.14 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, Change Order will be executed on a fixed price basis. B. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not predetermined, execute Work under a Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time will be computed as specified for a time and material Change Order. 1.15 TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits specified in General Conditions of the Contract. B. Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum and Contract Time as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract. C. Maintain and provide detailed records of work done on a time and materials basis. 1.16 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in General Conditions of the Contract. 1. Form for Change Orders: Architect's "Change Order"form. B. Proper signatures (original and dated)on CCD or Change Order authorize Contractor to proceed with Change. C. Promptly sign and date Change Order or provide detailed written and signed statement detailing reasons if refusing to sign. If the Contractor does not sign and return the Change Order, all aspects will be considered disputed, and Contractor shall not be paid on any Work on it. 1.17 DISTRIBUTION I A. Architect will distribute one electronic copy to Owner and Contractor. B. Change Orders: Upon authorization, Owner will transmit two signed originals to Architect. 1. Architect will retain one copy for its files. 2. Architect will transmit one copy to Contractor. C. Construction Change Directives: Upon authorization, Architect will issue one electronic copy to Owner and Contractor. 1. Directive describes Work Change additions or deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents. 2. Owner will sign and date as directive to proceed with Change and issue 3 copies to the Contractor. 3. Promptly sign, date and return two copies to the Architect. If Contractor does not agree with terms, it will proceed with changed Work and follow procedures noted in the General Conditions while still returning one copy to the Architect. 4. Distribution: a. Architect will issue one original to Owner while maintaining one for Architect's files. 1.18 CREDIT AMOUNT TO CONTRACT SUM - INSURANCE A. If a Change Order or Construction Change Directive results in a reduction of the Contract Sum, the Owner shall be entitled to a credit that includes the amount of the value of bond premium, amounts charged for additives for insurance premium. 1 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 26 00-4 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1.19 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item.Adjust Contract Sum as shown on Change Order. B. Promptly revise Progress Schedule to reflect any changes in Contract Time, revise subschedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION 1 1 I • I r I 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Pnnted 5/7/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 26 00 -5 SECTION 01 30 00 II ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS I SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Coordination. B. Preconstruction meeting. I C. Progress meetings. D. Preinstallation conferences. E. Requests for information(RFI). IF. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Submittal procedures. I H. Timing of submittals. I. Product submittals. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS I A. Section 01 32 00-Construction Progress Documentation: Form, content and administration of schedules. B. Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements: Testing Laboratory Reports and Manufacturer's Field I Services. C. Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements: Contractor's list of Products. 1 D. Section 01 70 00-Execution: Additional coordination requirements. 111 E. Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of all personnel, requirements and Work specified throughout the Contract Documents, including Work performed by subcontractors and suppliers. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and the work of the various Sections of the Specifications to I assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Contractor's work and responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following: I 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, delivery, tools, machines, facilities, and services necessary for the proper execution of the Work. 2. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and Work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed later. II 3. Ensure that notification to and inspections by permitting agencies are completed in a timely fashion. 4. Coordinate utility outages with a minimum of 24 hours advance notice to Owner. 5. Store, protect, and secure materials, on and off site. 6. Supervise and coordinate after hours work. I D. The separation of portions of the Work into particular divisions of the specifications or sections of the drawings may not in every case conform to the categories of work typically subcontracted to particular crafts or trades. Inform bidders, subcontractors, crafts and trades that work assigned to them may be contained in sections other than customary. In every case, provide I and coordinate at no additional cost to Owner, all work required in the Contract Documents. E. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for I installing, connecting to, and placing in service, all such equipment. I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00 - 1 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS F. Coordinate completion and cleanup of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner occupancy. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. The Owner will schedule a preconstruction conference before the start of construction, at a time convenient to the Owner, Contractor and the Architect, but no later than 10 days after execution of the Agreement.The conference will be held at the Project Site or another convenient location. The meeting shall be conducted to review general issues of responsibilities, communications, and contract administration procedures. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 1 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. 4. Contractor's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. 6. Major Suppliers when requested; others as appropriate. C. Agenda: 1. Status of the Contract, bonds, insurance or other contract requirements. 2. Status/timing of Notice to Proceed. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress1/1 schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect. 6. Contract administration responsibilities, communications and procedures. 7. Tentative Contractor's construction schedule. 8. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 9. Scheduling. -10. Related work by Owner and coordination with Contractor. 11. Contractor's safety plan. 12. Owner's requirements. 13. Working hours, site access and parking. 14. Contractor's site mobilization and storage areas. 15. Material and equipment deliveries. 16. Maintaining good neighborhood relations and achieving noise, store water, erosion and dust control. 17. Construction facilities and controls. 18. Security and housekeeping procedures. 19. Special inspection,testing and quality control, including procedures for testing. 20. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 21. Status of permits. 22. Progress meeting schedule date and time. 23. Review of Contract Documents and outstanding questions related thereto. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, 111 with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. I Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00 -2 Punted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 30 00 IADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS I A. Progress meetings will be conducted at the Project Site on a weekly basis, or at intervals otherwise agreed to. The schedule of the meetings shall be established by mutual consent of the Owner, Architect and Contractor. No changes to said schedule shall be made without mutual consent of the same parties. Coordinate preparation of the payment request with dates I of meetings. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. IC. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Contractor, Owner and the Architect, other individuals concerned with current progress or coordination may be represented at these meetings. Participation by Subcontractors shall be limited to attendance only when required by I the Architect or when a prearranged topic relating to the specific trade or supplier requires their attendance at the meeting. D. Agenda: I 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. I 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Status of RFI's, ASI's, Proposal Requests, CCD's and Change Orders. 7. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. I 8. Site access, utilization and parking. 9. Problems from or affecting occupants or neighbors. • 10. Permitting and agency issues. I 11. Quality/inspection issues. 12. Maintenance of progress schedule. a. Review progress since the last meeting; I b. Distribute Contractor's two-week look ahead schedule. c. Evaluate current activity is in relation to the Contractor's Schedule. d. Identify in advance potential delays involving: submittals, material/equipment procurement; approvals; Owner-furnished materials;or separate contracts, if any. I e. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; securing commitments from parties involved to do so. f. Determine whether a recovery schedule is required for the Contractor's Construction Schedule to insure completion within the contract time. 13. Coordination of projected progress. 14. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 15. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. I 16. Pay Application review at monthly interval. 17. Review of Project Record Documents. 18. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with one copy to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1111 1. Minutes shall number topics in a manner that reflects when each topic was first raised. I 2. Each topic shall reflect who is responsible for acting on the topic and date by which resolution is required. 3. No topic shall be dropped from the minutes until the method of resolution is recorded. I 3.03 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, convene a preinstallation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. I B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators, sub-contractors, Contractor, Owner's representative and Owner's special inspector involved in or affected by the Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District Il May 2013 Pnnted 5/7/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00 -3 I SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations, shall attend the meeting.Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. C. Notify Architect and Owner minimum four days in advance of meeting date. I D. Agenda: Review the progress of related construction activities, including drawing and specification requirements for the following: 1. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples and other required submittals. 2. Time schedules, 3. Weather limitations. 4. Manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Warranty requirements. 6. Acceptability of substrates. 7. Quality, inspection, and testing requirements. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. F. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. G. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. H. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 3.04 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIS) , A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor.Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Limit topics on each RFI to a single topic to expedite response. 3. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. 4. If Contractor disagrees with Architect's response to Contractor's RFI, Contractor shall notify Architect within seven days of receipt of response. Lack of such notification shall be understood to mean that Contractor agrees with response. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 4. RFI subject. 5. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 6. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 7. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 8. Contractor's suggested resolution. If proposed solution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, state impact in the RFI. 9. The following statement: a. 'This reply is not an authorization to proceed with work involving additional cost, time or both. If any reply requires a change to the Contract Documents, a Change Order or Construction Change Directive must be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to implementation of the reply. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with this RFI response indicates Contractor's acknowledgement that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time." 10. Contractor's signature. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00-4 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 30 00 IADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 11. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop I Drawings, coordination drawings and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. RFI Forms: Contractor's software-generated form with the content specified and as acceptable to the Architect. D. Architect's Action:Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. I 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of substitutions. b. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. c. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. d. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case I Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Work Changes Proposal Request according to Section 01 26 00-Contract Modification Procedures. I a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. b. A response to an RFI is not direction or approval of a change to either Contract Time I or Contract Sum. c. .Proceeding with the Work in accordance with an RFI response, without such written notification and an approved Change Order or Construction Change Directive, indicates Contractor's acknowledgement that there is no change to the Contract Time Ior the Contract Sum. E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor I disagrees with response. F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: I 1. Project name. 2. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 3. RFI description. 4. Date the RFI was submitted. I5. Date Architect's response was received. 6. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, Change Order and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1 I 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. I B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. ID. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00-CLOSEOUT • SUBMITTALS. I l Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00 -5 Pnnled 5/7/2013 1 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION 111 A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. I 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for Owner. No action will be taken. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect. 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 30 x 42 inches: Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect. B. Documents for Information:Submit two copies. 111 C. Samples:Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. • 3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit Schedule of all shop drawings, product data, and samples as specified in each individual Section of the Project Manual. Include submittal and installation dates of each product and assembly. Coordinate with construction schedule and allow ample time, but in no case fewer than 14 days,for Architect's review. Allow time for possible disapproval, correction, and resubmittal. B. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial 11submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 1. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable,will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required,field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 1. Architect will not accept or process submittals which do not reflect Contractor's review and approval. E. Deliver submittals to Architect at address listed on title sheet of Project Manual or as approved by Architect. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00 -6 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 30 00 IADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS G. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals prior to return of submittal I with Architect acceptance. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. I 1. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Contractor notates specific deviations and the deviations are specifically approved by the Architect. I I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 3.10 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. The listing of submittals hereinafter is set forth as a checklist for Contractor's convenience and is general in nature. I 2. Architect reserves the right to add to this list in case of omission of any submittals specked in other Sections but not listed hereinafter. B. Submittals- Required Within Seven Days Postbid: I 1. Letter from Insurance Company-insurance required effective upon Contract. 2. Letter from Surety-bonds required effective upon Contract. 3. Breakdown of bid (if requested). 4. Names of proposed suppliers for each of the principal portions of the Work. 111 5. Contractor's Construction Management Personnel: Project Manager- minimum 3 years experience; Field Superintendent-minimum 5 years experience. 6. Responsibility of Subcontractors. I 7. A designation of the Work to be performed by the Contractor by his own forces. C. Submittals- Required Within Seven Days After Notice of Intent to Award Contract(Prior to Execution of Contract): I 1. Final List of Subcontractors and major material suppliers for principal portions of the Work. 2. Evidence of bondability(Performance Bond and Payment Bond). 3. Certificates of Insurance(on AIA Document G705 or equivalent). 4. Actual costs(%)of the Contractor's liability insurance. I 5. Endorsements for additional insured. 6. Statements of State Worker's Compensation coverage. 7. Copy of Builder's Risk Policy. I 8. Project Organizational Chart. 9. Key Staff Resumes with telephone and contact information. 10. Contractor's Safety Plan. I 11. Summary of Warranties included in Bid, including duration and start time of each. Itemize any deviations from Bid Document requirements. 12. Other documents required by Contract Documents. I D. Submittals- Prior to Notice to Proceed: 1. Executed Agreement. 2. Certified copies of Contractor's Liability Insurance Policies(AIA Document G705). I E. Submittals-Within Seven Days Following Contract Execution and Prior to Commencing Work: 1. Deliver Bonds to Owner with copy to Architect. 2. Performance and Labor& Material Payment Bonds per Oregon Law with certified copy of Power of Attorney from Attorney-in-Fact executing bonds. 1 3. Certified Schedule of Prevailing Wage Rates(attach to executed contract). I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00-7 Printed 5/7/2013 1 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS I F. Submittals-Within Thirty Days Following Notice to Proceed and Prior to First Payment Application: 1. Schedule of values-submit at least 14-days in advance of application. 2. Schedule of submittals. 3. Copies of acquired and unacquired building permit licenses etc. to complete the Work of the Contract. Submit copies of any remaining permits as they are acquired. 4. Construction schedule. G. Submittals-Prior to Each Month's Progress Payment: 1. Submit 10 days in advance of date established for progress payment. 2. Application and Certificate for Payment(AIA Document G702 and G703). 3. Notarized affidavit of payments to all subcontractors and major material suppliers(see application for payment). II 4. Updated Construction Schedule. 5. Public Works Contractor Wage Certification per Oregon Law. H. Submittals- Prior to request for Substantial Completion: 1. Notification to Architect that Work of the Project is substantially complete. 2. Itemized listing of items of work to be completed or corrected. 3. Submit Certificate of Occupancy or Occupancy Permit issued by the Local Building Department for the entire Project. 4. Draft Operations and Maintenance Manuals and draft warranties. I. Submittals-Prior to request for Final Completion: 1. Certified copy of punchlist items completed. 2. Submit final Application for Payment. 3. Demonstration and Training training reports. 4. Final complete and correct Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Record Drawings of Contract Documents with all changes indicated. 111 6. Final dated and signedWarranties. 3.11 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Submit initial progress schedule as required in Section 01 32 00 -Construction Progress Documentation. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Review revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. See Section 01 32 00 for specific requirements. 3.12 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703. Contractor's standard form or media-driven printout will be considered on request. , B. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major Specification Sections. C. Revise schedule to list change orders, for each application for payment. I D. Comply with requirements in Section 01 20 00-Price and Payment Procedures. 3.13 PRODUCT SUBMITTALS-DETAILED REQUIREMENTS A. Submit 5 copies of each submittal. Maximum of three copies will be retained by the Architect. Provide additional copies as required for governing agency reviews. 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. Architect will retain selected sample for confirmation of subsequent submittals. 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00-8 Pnnted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 30 00 IADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 2. Samples for Verification: Provide 3 copies of samples unless more are required for I distribution to other subcontractors or fabricators for matching or preparation of finish samples. B. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with Project Name. C. Identify field-verified dimensions;show relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or products. D. Number submittals by submittal section number,followed by a number which sequentially I numbers submittals in order submitted to Architect. For example,the initial submittal of Joint Sealers 07 90 05 would be designated 07 90 05-1. If the submittal must be resubmitted it shall be identified as 07 90 05-1-R1 and subsequent resubmittal shall be sequentially numbered in order as resubmitted. I E. Shop Drawings: 1. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproduction of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. I 2. Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents including, but not limited to: a. Identification of products. b. Compliance with specified standards. I c. Notation of coordination requirements. d. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. e. Relationship and attachment to adjoining materials or assemblies, relevant field conditions and all necessary dimensions. IF. Product Data: 1. Submit number of copies as directed above. 2. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to Specification Section and Article number. 3. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. Delete I information not applicable. 4. Product data that has not been marked to indicate the applicable information will be returned without review. 5. Contractor shall assemble Product Data required for maintenance manuals and submit to IArchitect in accordance with Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals. G. Samples: Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes except when more restrictive I1. requirements are specified, indicating colors,textures, and patterns,for Architect selection. 2. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and 1 attachments. 3. Approved samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in the individual Specification Sections. 4. Label each sample with identification required for transmittal letter. I 5. Submit the number of samples specified in individual Specification Sections. One of which will be retained by the Architect. a. Submit additional samples when copies will be required for distribution to other subcontractors or fabricators for matching or preparation of finish samples. 6. Provide field samples of finishes at project site, at location acceptable to Architect, as required by individual Specifications Section. Install each sample complete and finished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in completed work if approved by Architect. H. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Provide at Minimum: Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, balancing, and finishing in accordance with Section 01 40 I 00-Quality Requirements. I Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00-9 Printed 517!2013 I SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS I. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturers'certificate to Architect/Engineer for review, in quantities specified herein. 111 2. Indicate material or product in conformance with or exceeding specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 3.• Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 30 00 - 10 Pnnted 5/7/2013 1 SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01 32 00 ' CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preliminary schedule. B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. ' C. Material location reports. D. Field condition reports. E. Special reports. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AGC(CPSM)-Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors ' of America. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Schedule:Within 14 days after date of Owner's Notice of Intent to Award the Contract, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. 1. Submit minimum two hard copies to Architect for review. 2. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. B. Construction Schedule:Within 14 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major Subcontractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. 2. Not less than 10 percent of the initial Application for Payment may be withheld until a ' complete Construction Progress Schedule has been submitted in a form acceptable to Architect and Owner. 3. Neither Owner or Architect shall be responsible for review of the entire substance of the Progress Schedule. 4. Within 30 days after dated established in Notice to Proceed, submit complete schedule. 5. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 6. At each progress meeting, submit the following: ' a. Updated schedule incorporating revisions to the construction schedule. b. A two-week look-ahead schedule listing current and upcoming activities by trade, including anticipated start and complete dates as applicable. C. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect. D. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 1.04 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. ' B. Diagram Sheet Size: Maximum 30 x 42 inches or width required. C. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 32 00 - 1 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart. B. Content 1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 2. Identify each item by specification section number. 3. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. 4. Include conferences and meetings in schedule. 5. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. 6. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. 7. Include not less than 15 days for startup and testing. 8. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00- Price and Payment Procedures. 9. Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final completion, unless otherwise indicated. 10. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. 2.02 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. 1 B. Identify the first work day of each week. 2.03 SCHEDULE -DRIVEN REQUIREMENTS A. A schedule for the purchase, delivery, and receipt of critical items required for performance of the Work, showing lead times between purchase order placement and delivery dates, shall be integrated with the Construction Progress Schedule. Neither the Architect nor the Owner shall be deemed to have approved or accepted any such material, or its schedule, nor deemed to have waived this requirement if some or all of the material is not received. B. Should the Contractor fail to meet any scheduled date as shown on the current Construction Progress Schedule, the Contractor shall, if requested, be required at its own expense to submit within ten days of the request an updated Construction Progress Schedule. If the Contractor's progress indicates to the Owner that the Work will not be Substantially Completed within the Contract Time, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, increase its work force and/or working hours to bring the actual completion dates of the activities into conformance with the Construction Progress Schedule and Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.The Contractor shall reschedule and also submit a revised Construction Progress Schedule at its own expense within ten days of notice from the Architect that the sequence of work varies significantly from that shown on the current Schedule showing work to complete on original 111 Contract Time with approved extensions. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will, however, be obligated to review the substance or sequence of the Construction Progress Schedule or otherwise determine whether it is correct, appropriate or attainable. C. Schedule Float Utilization: 1. Any float time to activities not on the critical path shall belong to the Project, and may be used by the Project to optimize its construction process.Any float time between the end of111 the final construction activity and the final completion date shall belong to the Owner, and may be used by the Owner in determining if additional contract days are to be awarded for changes in the contract or for delays to the contract caused by the Owner. The Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time, the Construction Schedule, or the Contract Sum, or to any additional payment of any sort by reason of the Owner's use of float time between the end of the final construction activity and the final completion date or by reason of the loss or use of any float time, including time between the Contractor's1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 32 00 -2 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 32 00 ICONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION anticipated completion date and end of the Contract Time, whether or not the float time is I described as such on the Construction Progress Schedule. D. Closeout: In the Contractor's Construction Schedule provide key activities required under Sections 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures and 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals. These activities I will be cost-loaded to a cumulative total of not less than 2 percent of the contract value. • 2.04 REPORTS A. Material Location Reports:At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of I materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. IB. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with I recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.05 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute Icopies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events:When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. I List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal. IB. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. 3.02 UPDATING SCHEDULE I A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. I C. Update diagram to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. I E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. 3.03 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE I A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in I schedules. END OF SECTION I I I Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 32 00 -3 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01 32 33 ' PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction photographs. B. Periodic construction photographs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements: Submittal requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1.04 USAGE RIGHTS ' A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. B. Do not display photographs in publications without permission of Owner. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels -and 400 dpi. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. I1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images:Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, ' without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Key Plan: Include digital copy of key plan with each electronic submittal; include point of ' view identification in each photo file name. 3. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. ' C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of Work, take photographs of areas of Work, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. ' 1. Take photographs as necessary to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction and to document deteriorated or damaged elements that need to be replaced. D. Periodic Construction Photographs:Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff ' date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. END OF SECTION ' Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 32 33- 1 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 40 00 IQUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 40 00 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. I C. Control of installation. D. Testing and inspection services. E. Manufacturers'field services. I1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. I B. Section 01 42 16-Definitions. C. Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. I 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. IB. Manufacturer's Instructions:When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special Iattention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. I D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for I compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Preconstruction Testing:Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before I products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. B. Experienced:When used with an entity or individual, "experienced"means having successfully I completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated;and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I 1.05 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS • A. Metal Thickness:Where thickness of metals is designated in both gage and thickness in inches, the thickness in inches shall govern. Gages are provided for convenience only. I Specified submittals for metals shall indicate thicknesses in inches. 1.06 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not I included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with l Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 40 00 - 1 Pnnted 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. 1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner Responsibilities:Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities:Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a 111 certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 3. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 4. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. 1.08 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Field Services:Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers'instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 40 00-2 Panted 577/2013 SECTION 01 40 00 IQUALITY REQUIREMENTS B. Testing Agency Duties: I 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. I 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. I 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. a. One copy of all testing and inspection reports shall be promptly sent directly to the Contractor,Architect, Owner, Structural Engineer, Building Department, Soils Engineer(Soil Compaction), unless otherwise directed. b. In addition to written reports, immediately notify by telephone Architect, Owner and Contractor of any portions of the work found to be in non-compliance with the I Contract Documents. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract I Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. ID. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. IN 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: I a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To facilitate geotechnical monitoring. e. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring I testing/inspection services. a. When tests or inspections cannot be performed, through the fault of the Contractor, reimburse the Owner for the additional costs incurred. I b. Schedule testing and inspection so that the services of testing and inspection personnel will be as continuous and brief as possible. c. Reimburse Owner for travel and lodging expenses incurred for testing and inspection services performed outside radius of 100 miles of the site. I 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. a. When tests or inspections cannot be performed, through the fault of the Contractor, I reimburse the Owner for the additional costs incurred. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. a. Schedule testing and inspection so that the services of testing and inspection b. Reimburse Owner for travel and lodging expenses incurred for testing and inspection services performed outside radius of 100 miles of the site. I E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating testing services so as to insure that tests are performed and reports delivered in a manner not to cause delays to the Work.Allow adequate Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District iiMay 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 40 00-3 Punted 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS time for inspection, geotechnical monitoring and any needed corrections before proceeding to the next construction stage. F. Furnish records, drawings, certificates, and similar data as may be required by the testing personnel to assure compliance with the Contract Documents. G. Provide to the testing agency the approved design mix to be used for concrete, mortar, grout, and other materials mixes which require testing by the testing laboratory. Furnish copies of product test reports performed by Contractor as required by Contract Documents. H. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. I. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY REPORTS ' A. The testing agency will perform and furnish the following: 1. Laboratory Test Reports: Furnish laboratory test reports of materials and construction as required, including: a. Date issued. b. Project tile and number. c. Testing laboratory or engineering firm name, address, and telephone number. d. Name and signature of representative. e. Description of method of test. f. Identification of sample and portion of the work tested g: Description of location in the work of the sample. h. Time and date of obtaining sample. i. Time and date of test of sample. j. Weather and climatic conditions. k. Evaluation of results tests, including recommendations for action, when requested by Architect or Structural Engineer. 2. Field Inspection Reports: Furnish field inspection reports for each site visit documenting activities, observations, and inspections of work being inspected include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Testing Laboratory or engineering firm name, address, and telephone number. d. Name and signature of representative. e. Observations on weather and climatic conditions. f. Time and date g. Conditions and/or status of the work being inspected. h. Actions taken. i. Recommendations or evaluation of the work. 3. Reports will be submitted to Owner and Architect in duplicate giving observations and results of tests, indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified standards and with Contract Documents. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES ' A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. , Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 40 00 -4 Pnnted 5!7/2013 1 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information ' documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address,and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. ' 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. ' 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. When tests or inspection indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent ' retesting occasioned by such noncompliance shall be performed by the same personnel as performed the initial tests or inspections, and the additional cost shall be paid by the contractor as stipulated under the Conditions of the Contract. ' B. Contractor shall remove and replace any work found defective or not in compliance with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to Owner, and furnish notice for retesting as specified herein above. C. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. D. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work,Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. hi 3.06 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. ' B. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION • I ' Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 40 00 -5 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 42 16 IDEFINITIONS SECTION 01 42 16 IDEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections. I 1.02 SPECIFICATION EXPLANATION A. The specifications are divided into Divisions and Sections for the convenience of writing and using. The titles of these are not intended to imply a particular meaning nor to fully describe the I work of each division or section,and are not an integral part of the text which specifies the requirements.The Architect is not bound to define the limits of any subcontract, and will not enter into disputes between the Contractor and its employees, including subcontractors. I B. These specifications are of the abbreviated, or"streamlined"type, and include incomplete sentences. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.Words that are implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract IDocuments indicates. C. Omissions of words or phrases shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as they are when a "note"occurs on the drawings. I D. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. The definitions in this Section are not necessarily complete or exclusive but, generally, apply to all portions of the Work. Some contractual definitions appear in the General Conditions. Definitions of words of a special nature which relate to Work covered in one or two Sections of I the Specifications are included in such Sections.Terms used throughout the Contract Documents are defined in this Section. B. Approve:Where used in conjunction with the Architect's or Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the term "approved"will be held to the limitations of the Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will "approval" by the I I Architect be interpreted as an assurance to the Contractor that the requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled. The term "or approved" used in conjunction with specified materials means"properly submitted and approved substitution request." Coordinate: The term "coordinate" means satisfactorily combine the work of all trades for a IC. complete and operating installation. D. Directed, Requested, etc.: Unless otherwise explained, terms such as"directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted"mean "directed by I the Architect", "requested by the Architect", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. I E. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations. I F. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of Divisions 01 Sections apply to entire work of Contract and, where so indicated, to the other elements of work which are included in the Project. I G. Guarantee and Warranty: "Warranty"is generally used in conjunction with products manufactured or fabricated away from the project site, and "guarantee" is generally used in I Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 42 16- 1 Punted 5/6/2013 1 SECTION 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS conjunction with units of work which require both products and substantial amounts of labor at the project site.The resulting difference is that warranties are frequently issued by manufacturers and frequently supported (partially) by product guarantees from contractors and/or installers. H. Indicated:A cross reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as"shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of"indicated", it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. I. Install: Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. J. Installer: The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or his Subcontractor or Sub- subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that Installers be recognized experts in the work they are engaged to perform. K. Product: The term "product"as used in the Project Manual includes materials, systems, and equipment provided by the Contractor for use in the Work. L. Project Manual:The term "Project Manual" is the volume which includes the Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, and the Specifications, Divisions 01 through 33 inclusive, as applicable, and as listed in the Table of Contents bound therein. M. Provide: Except to the extent further defined, the term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. N. Selected: The term "selected" means"selected by the Architect and Owner"; the Architect shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of a product or an installation. O. Site: Space available to the Contractor for performing the Work under this Contract, either exclusively or in conjunction with other contractors as part of the overall Project.The Site may be unimproved vacant land, an existing building or space within an existing building.The extent of the Site is shown on the Drawings. P. Specification Language: Imperative language is used, generally, throughout the Specifications. Requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities which must be performed by the Contractor or, when so noted, will be performed by others. Q. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED ' PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION 1 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 42 16- 2 Printed 5/6/2013 I SECTION 01 45 05 IFIELD ENGINEERING SECTION 01 45 05 I FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: I 1. Construction layout. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. I 3. Provide notice to the utility locator service at least 2 business days prior to any excavation work. Before commencing any excavation, provide notice of the scheduled commencement of excavation to all owners of underground facilities. Notice shall be communicated to the owners of underground utilities not less than 2 business days or I more than 10 business days before the scheduled date of commencement of excavation unless otherwise agreed by all parties involved. a. Attention: Oregon law requires you to follow rules adopted by the Oregon Utility I Notification Center. Those rules are set forth in OAR 952-001-0010 through 952-001- 0090. You may obtain copies by calling the center at 503-232-1987. If you have questions about the rules, you may contact the center. You must notify the center at least two business days before commencing any excavation. I 4. Excavation shall not proceed until all known facilities have been marked. 5. If an underground facility is damaged and such damage is the consequence of the failure to fulfill an obligation under the requirements of this Section, the party failing to perform I that obligation shall be liable for any and all damages in accordance with Oregon State Law. 6. Records: Maintain complete, orderly, legible and accurate logs of control and survey work I and utility locations as the work progresses. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to I adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. I 3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect I promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. IEND OF SECTION I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 45 05 - 1 Printed 5/7/2013 1 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utility installation. B. Support facilities installation. C. Security and protection installation. D. Mold and moisture control. E. Removal of temporary utilities, facilities and controls. I1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 70 00- Execution: For Progress cleaning. B. Section 01 7419-Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage, including delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage, discarding water- damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work. 1. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. 1 B. Dust-Control and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust-control and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of the work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge. 4. Other dust-control measures. 5. Waste management plan. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections:Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Utility Usage Charges: Pay for usage charges for all utilities. B. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. C. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in ' Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Pnnted 5/7/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 50 00- 1 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ' 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of ten individuals. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and tack and marker boards. 3. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F(20 to 22 deg C). 4. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc(215 lx)at desk height. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having I jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. Exercise measures to conserve water. 1. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 2. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets,wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Provide adequate number of facilities for use by all persons and trades employed on Work during construction period. 2. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 3. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted. D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust,fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. E. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment I in a condition acceptable to Owner. 1. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as needed. Provide flexible power cords as required. 2. Power connection and consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 10 foot candles. 2. Provide and maintain 2 foot candles lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. 3. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. 4. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 5. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 6. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. G. Telecommunication Service: Provide temporary telecommunication service in corn mon-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. 1. Telephone Land Lines: Install one telephone line(s)for each field office. a. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. I 1) Police and fire departments. 2) Ambulance service. 3) Contractor's home office. 4) Architect's office. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 50 00 -2 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 50 00 ITEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 5) Engineers'offices. 6) Owner's office. 7) Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 2. Internet Connections: Minimum of one DSL modem or faster. 3. Email:Account/address reserved for project use. 4. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.02 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION I A. Vehicular Access and Parking: Conduct the Work so as to ensure the least possible obstruction to vehicular traffic and inconvenience to the general public and the residents in the vicinity of the Work and to ensure the protection of persons, property and natural resources. No road or I street shall be closed to the public except with the permission of the Owner and the proper governmental authority. Make temporary provisions to ensure the use of sidewalks,fire lanes, private and public driveways and proper functioning of gutters, sewer, inlets, drainage ditches I and culverts, irrigation ditches and natural water courses, if any on the Work site. 1. Construct and maintain temporary access to public thoroughfares to serve construction area, as necessary. a. Relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic I flow. 2. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. 3. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants,free of obstructions. I 4. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 5. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 6. Provide barricades, warning signs,flag men or other traffic regulators which may become I necessary for protection of public, construction personnel and property. 7. Protect existing pavement and driveways from damage from construction equipment. B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. I 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. C. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Temporary Signs: Provide signs as required to inform public and individuals seeking I entrance to Project. 2. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I Comply with Section 01 70 00 -Execution for progress cleaning requirements. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19-Construction Waste Management and Disposal. I 2. Provide construction dumpsters. Do not intermingle trash with school dumpsters. 3.03 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct I construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on Project Site prohibited. Provide I dump box for collection of waste materials. 2. Disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner) in storm or sanitary sewer systems is strictly prohibited. I B. Progress Cleaning: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 70 00- Execution. Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District I May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 50 00 -3 Punted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree-or plant- protection zones. 2. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from the project site during the course of the project. 3. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Barriers: Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. 1. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. 2. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. 3. Provide barricades required by governing authorities for work in public right of way. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin,furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence:As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Coordinate extent with Owner and Architect prior to installing fencing. 2. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence, unless otherwise indicated., , 3. Provide 6 foot high fence. Equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. a. Provide support blocks and bracing as required to completely stabilize fencing and gates. b. Maintain fencing for duration of construction. Move fencing as required for orderly progression of work; maintain secure enclosure at all times. c. Remove fencing and supports prior to Substantial Completion, when such removal will not create a safety hazard for the public. F. Security: Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1 G. Barricades,Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types I needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Take all precautions to prevent possibility of fire resulting from construction operations. Particularly avoid hazardous accumulations of rubbish and unsecured, flammable materials. 5. Provide emergency fire extinguishing equipment of adequate type and quantity, readily available and properly maintained. I. Temporary First Aid Facilities: Provide adequate first aid facilities for construction personnel. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 50 00 -4 Punted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 50 00 ITEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3.04 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping moisture in finished work. Document II visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase:When materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to I airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. I 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openirrgs covered or dammed. 6. Discard or replace water-damaged material. I 7. Do not install material that is wet. 8. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 3.05 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS IN A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment,facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. IC. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. END OF SECTION 1 I I I . I 1 1 I I I I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 50 00- 5 Pnnted 5/7/2013 1 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufacturer's standard warranties and special warranties. B. General product requirements. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date. B. Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List:Submit list of major products and list of finish materials proposed for use, with name of manufacturer,trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. 3. Indicate product lead times. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit a separate form for each item upon which approval is requested, with the exception of groups of items(e.g., electrical fixtures, plumbing fixtures, etc.)for which an itemized listing may be attached. C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the I manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 60 00 - 1 Pnnted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect before proceeding. E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.05 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty:Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. 1. Means new material, machinery, components, equipment,fixtures, and systems comprising the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work. 2. Products may also include existing materials or components when specifically designated for reuse. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. 2.02 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, I are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories,trim,finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 60 00-2 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected,"Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming Products of More than One Manufacturer: Use one of the products named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. D. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. E. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Submit a request for substitution for other named manufacturers. Use of manufacturers not named not allowed. F. Visual Matching Specification:Where Specifications require"match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements for substitutions � , G. ' Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by 4 Architect from manufacturer's full range"or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts,tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period.Comply with requirements specified in this section. Requests receive after that time will not be considered except as specified below under"Substitutions Requested After Award of Contract." B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor/Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product. 2. Will provide identical warranty as required for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will pay for changes to building design, including architectural or engineering design, detailing, construction costs, or re-approval by authorities caused by the requested substitution. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 60 00 -3 Pnnted 5/7/2013 1 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS D. Substitutions after Award of Contract will not be considered when: 1. Indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without formal request submitted in accordance with this Section. 2. Submittal for substitution request has not been reviewed and recommended by Contractor. Substitution requests received directly from Subcontractors or Suppliers will be returned through the Contractor without review. 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or other items of the Work. 4. Submittal for substitution request does not include point-by-point comparison of proposed substitution with specified product. E. Substitution Request Form: 1. Use Substitution Request Form for substitution requests during the bid phase. 2. Use"Substitution Request(After the Bidding Phase)"form bound at the end of this Section for substitution requests after the Award of Contract. F. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: 1. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. 2. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 3. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any,from the Work specified. • 4. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. 5. Samples,where applicable or requested. 6. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. 7. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 8. List of availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. 9. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. 10. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,from ICC- ES. 11. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. 12. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 13. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. 14. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. G. Accepted Substitutions prior to Bid Date will be listed in Addenda published in accordance with Advertisement for Bids and the Instructions to Bidders. Bidders will not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. H. Architect's Action for Substitutions After Award of Contract: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 daysof receipt of a request for substitution.Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 60 00 -4 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. 1. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 2. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 3.02 SUBSTITUTIONS REQUESTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT IA. Substitutions will normally not be considered after date listed in Document 00 21 13-111 Instructions to Bidders, except when required due to unforeseen circumstances. Within a period of 30 days after date of Contract,the Owner may,at its option, consider formal written requests for substitution of products in place of those specified when submitted in accord with the requirements stipulated herein.To receive consideration, one or more of the following conditions must be documented in any such request: 1. The substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of Code requirements or insurance regulations. 2. The substitution is required due to unavailability of a specified product, through no fault of the Contractor. 3. The substitution is required because subsequent information disclosed the inability of the specified product to perform properly or to fit in the designated space. 4. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. C. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. E. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ' A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. C. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. D. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. E. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. F. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District ' May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 60 00- 5 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS G. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. H. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. I I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. J. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with I foreign matter. K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, I disfigurement, or damage. M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION • I I I I I 1 I I I I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 60 00-6 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION SECTION 01 70 00 IPART 1 GENERAL EXECUTION 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Protection of installed construction. 1 C. Correction of the Work. D. Progress cleaning. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 45 05-Field Engineering: Construction layout. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 -Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust,fumes, vapors, or gases. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer or Applicator present where applicable, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report:Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for food service, mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. a. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. a. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 111 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings in substrate prior to applying next material or substance. Protect No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 70 00 - 1 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. D. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product.Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. E. Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. I F. Review Contract Documents and field conditions. Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of existing conditions prior to starting work. I B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Make consistent texture on surfaces with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 5. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 6. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Attachment: Provide blocking, attachment plates, anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights:Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings,templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, 111 arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 70 00-2 Printed 5/7/2013 I SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: Architect Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page:, Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No: Installer: Address: Phone: History: El New Product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑ 5-10 years old El More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: Point by Point comparative data attached- REQUIRED Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes, explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ Page 1 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including WE design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination, installation and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. 111 Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: I Telephone: Attachments: I REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 30 00. ❑ Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 30 00. ❑ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. I O Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: 111 Additional Comments: El Contractor 0 Subcontractor ❑ Supplier ❑ Manufacturer ❑ NE ❑ I I I I Page 2 ' . SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION 3.05 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. Il. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work.Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work.Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3. Refer to Section 01 10 00-Summary for additional requirements. 3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate I work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. G. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. H. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.07 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 70 00 -3 Printed 5!712013 I SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION I 4. Daily cleaning shall include magnetic sweep of jobsite to pick up all nails and metallic debris. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. I C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19- Construction Waste Management and Disposal. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place.Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. END OF SECTION I I 1 I 1 I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 70 00-4 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 12 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete, asphalt paving and cutting, and concrete masonry cutting, breaking and removal. B. Removal or repair and/or replacement of all items that are damaged as a result of this scope of work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. CSDA—Concrete Sawing and Drilling Association, Inc. 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Cost of repair of all exiting items to remain that are damaged as a result of this scope of Iwork shall be borne by the Contractor. A. Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction", Workmen's Compensation Board "Safety Code for Construction Work", Oregon State Employment Act Safety Requirements, and Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA)requirements, as applicable, apply to the work specified herein. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable governmental requirements for disposal of removed items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS(not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STANDARDS A. Sawcutting of concrete shall be done in accordance with CSDA recommendations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Closures, Barricades and Protection: provide temporary barricades as necessary to I B. control traffic around construction area and as necessary to ensure safety. Protect construction as work progresses. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Demolish in orderly and careful manner. Protect adjacent construction. B. Do all demolition necessary to complete the work. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to cut, alter, remove or temporarily remove and replace, existing construction I C. where indicated or as necessary for the completion of the project. Remove materials to reinstalled or retained in such a manner as to prevent damage. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. D. All items identified for removal in Construction Drawings is to be disposed of offsite at the Contractors expense. 3.4 CONCRETE AND/OR ASPHALT CUTTING A. Layout cutting and drilling work removal. B. Protect adjacent construction from water and slurry damage in work area and in areas below and behind work area. I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 73 29-1 Pnnted 04/30/13 I SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.5 ALTERATION PROCEDURES A. Prepare surfaces and remove concrete and/or asphalt chunks and debris to provide for proper installation of new work. B. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in level, texture and appearance as best as possible, or, when finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. I END OF SECTION I I I I i I I I I I I 1 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 73 29-2 Printed 04/30/13 I SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring. 5. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 6. Glass. 7. Gypsum drywall and plaster. 8. Plastic buckets. 9. Paint. 10. Plastic sheeting. 11. Rigid foam insulation. E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. Protect No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 7419- 1 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 74 19 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 111 H. Recycling:The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. 1. Return:To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse:To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage:To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well in production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. 111 O. Trash:Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s)where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e.whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. PART 2 PRODUCTS 111 2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements for substitution submission procedures. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 74 19 -2 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 74 19 ICONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, I salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings, particularly I at: 1. Pre-bid meeting. 2. Pre-construction meeting. 3. Regular job-site meetings. I E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. I 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. I F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products I in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials.Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. 1 H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. 1 END OF SECTION I . I I I I 1 .1 I I Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 74 19-3 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 77 00 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Substantial Completion. B. Final Completion. C. Punch List. D. Warranties. E. System startup. • F. Adjusting. G. Final Cleaning. H. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance (O&M)data, warranties and bonds. B. Section 01 79 00-Demonstration and Training: Requirements relating to Owner training prior to Closeout. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting review for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. In progress payment request coincident with or first following date claimed, show either 100 percent completion for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete", or list incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete. Include I supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents. a. Submit statement showing accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit drafts for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 6. Prepare and submit drafts for Project Record Documents. 7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Submit an itemized receipt, signed by Owner, to Architect. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction tools and similar elements. 9. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 13. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. a. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. b. Provide copy of Occupancy Permit to Architect and Owner. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 77 00- 1 Printed 5/7/2013 1 SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 111 B. Review: Submit a written request for review for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, , Architect will either proceed with review or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after review or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Results of completed review will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 2. Should the Architect have to perform any additional reviews due to failure of Work to comply with claims of completion made by Contractor, the cost for each additional review will be charged to the Owner at the Architect/Engineer's hourly rate.The Owner shall have the right to deduct such charges from the contract amount as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. . 1.04 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final review for determining final completion, . I complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment with final waivers according to Section 01 20 00- Price and Payment Procedures. a. Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional (final)changes to Contract Sum. 2. Submit consent of surety. 3. Prepare and submit final Project Record Documents within 30 days after date of Substantial Completion or before final completion, whichever occurs first. 4. Submit final warranties. is 5. Submit final operation and maintenance manuals. 6. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion review list of items to be completed or corrected(punch list).The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 8. Submit permanent Certificate of Occupancy. 9. Submit payment and release of liens to requirements of General Conditions. Before final payment, the Contractor shall furnish the following to the Architect: a. An affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner of property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied(use AIA Form G706 or approved). b. An affidavit from each Subcontractor on AIA Form G706 or approved. c. Letter from Bonding Company addressed to Owner but submitted to the Architect, approving release of final payment and waiving submission of final receipts as well as a statement confirming the extension of the Bond for the warranty period as specified. Final receipts from all Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers may be required to furnish to the Owner by the Contractor if the Surety does not waive this requirement. Letters to be in substantially the following form: (Name of Owner)Re: (Bond No.) (Address)(Name of Contractor) (Name of Project) I Gentlemen: The(Name of Bonding Company), surety on the above named Bond, consents to payment of retained percentages and agrees to waive submission of final receipts. It is also agreed that the final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations and that the Bond is extended to include guarantees and warranties of workmanship and materials. (NAME OF BONDING COMPANY) Attorney-in-Fact d. Submit Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens(AIA Form G706A). I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 77 00 -2 Pnnted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 77 00 ICLOSEOUT PROCEDURES e. Return all copies of the Drawings and Specifications in accordance with the General I Conditions. 10. Submit Affidavit of Wages Paid for Contractor and all sub-contractors. 11. Submit Employment Security Release. 12. Submit Department of Revenue Release(for projects over$35,000 only). I 13. Complete startup testing of systems. 14. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 1 I 15. Submit attendance record for training of Owner's personnel. 16. Complete requirements of Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals. 17. Complete requirements of Section 01 79 00-Demonstration and Training. I B. Review: Submit a written request for final review for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with review or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will either prepare a letter to Owner recommending final acceptance or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I 1. Additional Reviews: Request an additional review when the Work identified in previous reviews as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Should the Architect have to perform any such additional reviews due to failure of Work to I comply with claims of completion made by Contractor, the cost for each additional review will be charged to the Owner at the Architect/Engineer's hourly rate.The Owner shall have the right to deduct such charges from the contract amount as provided in the Conditions of 1 the Contract. 3. Provide additional cleaning services as required for Work which was not complete at the time of initial review. Reclean as required until all Work is fully complete and recommended for final acceptance by Architect. I 4. If the Work does not achieve Final Completion within two weeks of the date originally scheduled to do so, plus any time adjustments by Change Order, the Architect's time and efforts beyond that period shall constitute extra services, the cost of which at the I Architect's standard hourly rates will be deducted from the Contractor's Final Payment or retainage by the Owner. 5. Punch list items in the Schedule of Values will be released on any given line item only when all punchlist items relating to that line item are satisfactorily completed. III1.05 CONTRACTOR'S LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if I necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,floors, equipment, and building systems. I 2. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. 111 d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: Ia. PDF electronic file. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: I 1. Submit summary of warranties included in the bid within seven days after Notice of Intent to Award Contract(Prior to Execution of the Contract). Indicate duration of each warranty and start date. 1 2. Submit sample warranties as part of the project submittal process. 3. Submit final warranties before requesting review for final acceptance. I Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 77 00 -3 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES B. Comply with requirements of Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up and functional testing of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required I by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's 'I representative in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. F. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units and retest. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. I H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting review for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains,films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 77 00 -4 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over"UL"and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. I. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition,free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grilles. o. Clean ducts, blowers,and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever I is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION I I I I I I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 77 00 -5 Pnnted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1 C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections:Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: 1. Draft: Submit one copy of marked-up record prints prior to request for review for Substantial Completion. 2. Final: Submit one paper copy set and an electronically scanned copy of marked up prints within 30 days of dated established for Substantial Completion or prior to request for review for final completion, whichever occurs first. 3. Approved permit set of plans. B. Record Specifications: 1. Draft: Submit one copy of marked-up copy of Project Manual prior to request for review for Substantial Completion. 2. Final: Submit one copy of marked-up copy of Project Manual and one electronically scanned copy within 30 days of date established for Substantial Completion or prior to request for review for final completion, whichever occurs first. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Draft: Submit one copy of draft manuals prior to request for review for Substantial Completion.Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 2. Final: Submit two sets of revised Manuals and an electronically scanned copy in final form prior to request for review for final completion. D. Warranties and Bonds: 1. Submit a summary of warranties included in the bid within seven days after Notice of Intent to Award Contract(Prior to Execution of the Contract). Indicate duration of each warranty and start date. 2. Draft: Submit as part of normal submittal process. 3. Final: Submit final forms of warranties prior to request for review for final completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and Construction Change Directives. 5. ASI's and responses to RFI's. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 78 00 - 1 Printed 5/7/2013 I • SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 6. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 7. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. The record documents shall include all disciplines of work whether changes occur or not. These documents, as well as the approved permit set of plans, shall be available to the Architect and Owner at the site and reviewed with them on a monthly basis. Satisfactory maintenance of up- to-date record drawings on a monthly basis will be a requirement for approval of progress payments. C. Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. D. Record Drawings: 1. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Locations of concealed internal utilities. • i. Changes made by Addenda. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders, including ASI's and responses to RFPs. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 2. Record drawings shall include, as a minimum, the location and performance data on each piece of equipment, general configuration of pipe distribution system, including sizes. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Mark revisions and/or clarifications issued by Addenda, ASI, Construction Change Directive, Change Orders or responses to RFI's to reflect the change. Each such revision shall be graphically depicted to represent physical construction and clearly noted with the applicable Addenda, ASI, Change Order or RFI number. Notation of the Addenda, RFI, ASI, Construction Change Directive or Change Order number alone will not be acceptable. 7. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. 8. Scanned Drawings:After review of draft drawings by Architect, incorporate necessary changes and prepare a full set of scanned Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings on CD- ROM. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section a description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 1 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 78 00 -2 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 2. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 3. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Mark revisions and/or clarifications issued by Addenda,ASI, Construction Change Directive, Change Orders or responses to RFI's to reflect the change. Each such revision shall be graphically depicted to represent physical construction and clearly noted with the applicable Addenda, ASI, Change Order or RFI number. Notation of the Addenda, RFI, ASI, Construction Change Directive or Change Order number alone will not be acceptable. 5. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s)of marked up paper copy of Specifications. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text:As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product,Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. 2. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 3. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. D. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. E. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. F. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 78 00 -3 Printed 5/7/2013 I SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS I C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. 111 D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. I E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. J. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. K. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. L. Additional Requirements:As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size.When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. I G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating 111 drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Pert 2. Operation)and .IIISAAU1tV11{/1IVV instructions, CII(Canged Vr systCC.all and subd1V14GV by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 78 00 -4 Printed 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Certificates. c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. L. PDF Electronic File:After review of draft manuals, assemble each manual into a composite electronically-indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. 1. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance directory. 2. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 3. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Related Damages and Losses:When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty:When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. 1 D. Owner's Recourse:Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. I 2. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept or pay for Work for the Project where a Special Warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. E. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers,within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined. F. Verify that documents are in proper form and contain full information. G. Co-execute submittals when required. H. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Printed 5/7/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 78 00 - 5 I SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS I. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. J. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of111 Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. K. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Installer of product or item,with name of principal, address, and telephone number. 3. Describe the work provided by this installer/Subcontractor, under this Contract. 4. Date of beginning of warranty or service and maintenance contract. (See General Condition's Warranty paragraph.) 5. Duration of warranty or service maintenance contract. 6. Information for Owner's personnel, including: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. I b. Contact phone numbers of manufacturer. 7. Instances that might affect validity of warranty or bond. 8. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number. L. Schedule of Warranties: Provide a summary schedule of start and end date of each warranty. M. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION 1 I I I 1 I 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 78 00 -6 Printed 5/7/2013111 I SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 01 79 00 IDEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. Plumbing equipment. 2. Food service equipment. C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for: I 1. Roofing products. 2. Finishes, including flooring finishes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS I A. Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals. B. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill- level of attendees. I 1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. I 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. I b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. I f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used,such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be I provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. I 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and 1 maintenance data. D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. I 2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that I could not be answered in original training session. E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for Owner's subsequent use. I 1. Format: DVD Disc. 2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date. I Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Pooled 517!2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 79 00 - 1 I SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 111 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 DEMONSTRATION-GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section,unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. D. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and I repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 3.02.TRAINING -GENERAL I A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up"time. E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup111 copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information,, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. F. Product-and System-Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. d Prnviric,hanriQ_nn trnininn nn all nati nrannn! mnriac nnccihia anrt nravantiva maintcnnr•n 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 79 00-2 Pnnted 5/7/2013 SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION I I I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I 1 I Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 01 79 00 -3 Pnnted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 02 41 19 ISELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION SECTION 02 41 19 ISELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alterations purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS I A. Section 01 10 00-Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 50 00-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. IC. Section 01 73 29-Cutting and Patching: Cutting of concrete and asphalt paving. D. Section 07 51 00- Built-up Bituminous Roofing: Cutting and patching of existing roof to accommodate Work of this Project. I E. Section 31 20 00-Earth Moving: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS IA. NFPA 241 -Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS I A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents:Accurately record actual locations of capped'arid active utilities and subsurface construction. IIII PART 2 PRODUCTS--NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE I A. Remove portions of existing buildings as indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Remove existing cooler and freezer units and associated rooftop compressor units and I roof penetrations. 2. Sawcut slabs where indicted to extent necessary to accommodate new slab construction. 3. Remove existing gypsum board and wall insulation to extent indicated. I 4. Coordinate with Work of Section 07 51 00 for cutting and patching of existing roofing to accommodate installation of new cooler/freezer and associated compressors. 5. Removal of existing VCT flooring and mastic where indicated. I B. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as required so that required rough grade elevations do not subside within one year after completion. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. I 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be I removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. l I 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District I May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 02 41 19- 1 Pnnted 5/8/2013 I SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION I 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. C. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. I 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stopwork immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. I E. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice,flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. F. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. I 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19-Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. 1. Coordinate a utility coordinate 48 hour prior to beginning anyutility construction for location mark-up of all existing utilities. Coordinate the utilitylocal with municipality having jurisdiction for all utility work within a public right-of-way. Inform Architect if locate indicates that existing utilities are different than shown on Drawings. 2. Attention: Oregon law requires you to follow rules adopted by the Oregon Utility Notification Center. Those rules are set forth in OAR 952-001-0010 through 952-001- 0090. You mayou _ obtain copies by callingthe center at 503 232-1987. Ifyou have questions q tons about the rules,you may contact the center.You must notify the center at least two business days before commencing any excavation. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utilitytype; protect p tect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piin9, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations undations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 02 41 19-2 Printed 5/8/2013 I SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. E. Services(Including but not limited to Plumbing and Electrical): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris,junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 7419 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION 1 I I 1 I Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Printed 5/8/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 02 41 19-3 I SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 ICAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete reinforcement. D. Concrete curing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117-Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI 211.1 -Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. C. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. D. ACI 302.1 R-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction;American Concrete Institute International. E. ACI 304R-Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. F. ACI 308R-Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. G. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary;American Concrete Institute International. H. ACI 347-Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. I. ASTM A6151A615M-Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. J. ASTM C31/C31 M-Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. K. ASTM C33/C33M-Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. L. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. M. ASTM C42/C42M-Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. N. ASTM C94/C94M-Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 1 O. ASTM C143/C143M-Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. P. ASTM Cl50/C150M-Standard Specification for Portland Cement. Q. ASTM C171 -Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. R. ASTM C172/C172M-Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete S. ASTM Cl 73/C173M-Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. T. ASTM C231/C231 M-Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. U. ASTM C260 -Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. V. ASTM C494/C494M-Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. W. ASTM C618-Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00 - 1 Printed 5/8/2013 1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE X. ASTM C1064/C1064M -Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. Y. ASTM 01240 -Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. ' Z. ASTM E1643-Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. AA. ASTM E1745-Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. I' B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers'data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. Provide design mixtures for each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather,test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 2. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. E. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold-and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation,floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 1 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00 -2 Panted 5!8/2013 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation and separate vapor barrier at existing exterior walls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 11 40 00- Foodservice Equipment: Board insulation installed between slabs at freezer. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1136-Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. B. ASTM C1289-Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. C. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, product limitations, and formaldehyde content. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on installation techniques. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS ' A. Do not expose foam-plastic board to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. B. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Inside Existing Exterior Walls: Polyisocyanurate board. 2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289;Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. ' B. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Compressive Strength:20 psi 2. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 19. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Manufacturers: a. Rmax Inc.;Thermasheath-3: www.rmax.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM C1136, flame retardant facing consisting of 0.00030 inch aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforcing and kraft paper laminated together with flame retardant adhesive. 1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 1.0 perms or less. 2. Flame Spread Index: 10 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 5 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 21 00- 1 Printed 5/8/2013 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 4. Products: a. Johns Manville Corporation; Product Commercial Facing 35TL: www.jm.com. b. Lamtec Corporation; Product R-3035 HD:www.lamtec.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Seals and Sealants: Chemically and physically compatible with adjacent materials at locations to eliminate uncontrolled air leakage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verity that all existing insulation has been removed from wall cavities. 1 B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXISTING CAVITY WALLS A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,filling entire wall cavity full height to roof deck above. 1. Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. D. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. 1. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. 2. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. I E. Seal vapor retarder at penetrations, and perimeter floor,wall and ceiling terminations to eliminate uncontrolled air leakage. 3.03 PROTECTION I A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1 Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 21 00-2 Pnnted 5/8/2013 SECTION 07 51 00 IBUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING SECTION 07 51 00 IBUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING ' PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cutting and patching of built-up roofing membrane, conventional application to accommodate new cooler/freezer compressors and roof penetrations for the cooler/freezer replacement. I B. Insulation, flat. C. Base flashings. D. Roofing cant strips and accessories. 1 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02 41 19-Selective Structure Demolition: Removal of existing compressors. B. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry:Wood curbs. C. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings and other items specified in that Section. D. Section 11 40 00- Foodservice Equipment: New compressors to be installed on new roof curbs and related penetrations. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS I A. ASTM B29-Standard Specification for Refined Lead. B. ASTM C208-Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. C. ASTM C1289-Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal IInsulation Board. D. ASTM D41 -Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dam pproofing, and Waterproofing. IE. ASTM D1863/D1863M -Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-Up Roofs. F. ASTM D4586/D4586M -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. G. ASTM D4601/D4601 M -Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. H. FM DS 1-28-Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation. . I I. NRCA ML104-The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association. J. UL (RMSD)-Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. I 1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review demolition, preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and I scheduling required with related work. Review all rooftop equipment to be placed/secured on the roof. 2. Meet with Owner, Architect, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including I installers of roof-mounted equipment. 3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. I 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 5. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. I 6. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 51 00 - 1 Pnnted 5/13/2013 1 SECTION 07 51 00 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane and bitumen materials, base flashing 111 materials, insulation, and surfacing. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Roofing System: Provide long term protection from water migration from entering building through the roof membrane. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform Work of this Section who I has specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project; who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product; and who is eligible to receive the standard roofing manufacturer's warranty. Certify that neither the company nor any of its officers have been in bankruptcy for the past ten years 1. Certified installers for repair work for existing roof system are as follows: a. Anderson Roofing Company, Portland/Salem, OR. b. Griffith Roofing, Beaverton, OR. c. Snyder Roofing Company, Tigard, OR. d. Umpqua Roofing, Eugene, OR. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Do not deliver roofing materials, coatings, roofing felt, etc.for storage at the site sooner than 24 hours before needed for application in the Work. C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Do not leave materials exposed to the elements. Remove all wet and damp materials from the site. , D. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. E. Store roofing felts on end. Store felts in a totally dry area such as in a totally enclosed van, truck or trailer. Coverings over roofing felts stored on the roof shall be loose fitting and blocked up away from the felts to provide adequate ventilation and prevent condensation from forming and/or coming in contact with the felts. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS I A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. r Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 51 00-2 Pnnted 5/13/2013 SECTION 07 51 00 IBUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Roofing work shall conform to manufacturer's requirements to maintain any existing warranty for labor and materials covering weather-tightness and water-tightness of the existing roofing I system. Manufacturer warranting the existing roof system shall provide a letter of acceptance of completed work at completion of project. C. Provide 2 year Contractor's warranty against failure of repair related to any material or I workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS I A. To ensure warrant ability and compatibility of new and existing roof membranes, the adhesive and sheet good products shall be provided by the same manufacturers as the original roof system. I 1. Manufacturer of Original Roof System: Tremco, Inc. 2.02 ROOFING -CONVENTIONAL APPLICATION A. Cold Built-Up Roof System: Minimum three-ply asphalt tri-laminate fiberglass and polyester I reinforced composite felt, cold applied membrane system with elastomeric base flashing and roofing aggregate in waterborne cold applied flood coat, over adhered cover board over polyisocyanurate insulation system. 1 B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Roof Covering External Fire-resistance Classification: UL Class A. 2. Factory Mutual Classification: Class I and windstorm resistance of 1-90, in accordance with FM DS 1-28. I 3. Insulation Thermal Value(R), minimum:To match existing. C. Surfacing: Aggregate. 1 2.03 MATERIALS A. Ply Sheets and Separator Sheets:ASTM D4601 Type II; trilaminate polyester and fiberglass reinforced felts. 1. Product: Tremco BURmastic Composite Ply HT. B. Base Flashing Material:TRA elastomer, laminated to a high-strength polyester reinforcing scrim. Product: Tremco TRA Elastomeric Sheeting. II. C. Cold Process Asphaltic Adhesive: Asbestos free, low volatile fibrated asphaltic adhesive. 1. Product: Tremco BURmastic Adhesive LV. I D. Asphalt Primer:ASTM D41, polymer modified asphalt emulsion. 1. Product: Tremco Trem prime QD. E. Asphalt Mastic: ASTM D4586 fibrated asphalt mastic. I F. Surfacing Adhesive: Cold process,water-based restorative coating. 1. Product: Tremco ECOLastic. G. Flashing Adhesive: Trowel grade solvent free modified rubber mastic. I1. Product: Tremlar LRM "V". H. Insulation Adhesive: Solvent free, moisture curing urethane based insulation adhesive. 1. Product: Tremco Fas'N'Free Adhesive. I I. Flashing Surfacing: Ready-mixed double duty aluminum coating. 1. Product: Tremco Double Duty Aluminum. J. Stripping Adhesive For Metal Edges and Lead Flanges: ASTM D4586 asphalt mastic. 1 K. Stripping Ply: Vinyl coated glass mesh. Non-shrinking, vinyl coated, woven glass mesh for reinforcement or repair of roof membranes and flashings. I Prole ct No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Printed 5/13/2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 51 00 -3 I SECTION 07 51 00 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING ' L. Stripping Adhesive for Metal Edge:Trowel grade solvent free modified rubber adhesive. 1. Product:Tremco Tremlar LRM "VL. M. Sheathing Paper: Rosin sheathing paper. , N. Cant Strips:ASTM C208, impregnated fiberboard, 2 inches thick by 5 inch face width, minimum. O. Roofing Aggregate:ASTM D1863, hard, durable, opaque; washed free of clay, loam,sand or other foreign substances. 1. Size: To match existing. P. Sealants: Drawband sealant, FS TT-S-00230C(2), single component, acrylic sealant. Q. Lead Flashing:ASTM B29, 4 pound sheet lead. R. Fasteners: 1. Simplex fasteners for installation of base sheet over wood deck. 2. Olympic Fasteners with 3-inch metal plate for installation of insulation over wood deck. S. Cover Board: 1/2-inch thick fiberboard, asphalt coated six sides as manufactured by Temple Inland, Inc. or similar. T. Flat and Tapered Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 2, and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi 2. Board Thickness: 1-inch minimum.Total thickness to match existing. 3. Board Edges: Square, 4. Manufacturer: As approved by roofing manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Installation of New Compressor Curbs and Penetrations: 1. Remove and dispose of existing roof membrane and insulation as required to accommodate new work. 2. Coordinate with Work of Section 02 41 19-Selective Structure Demolition for removal of existing compressors and related roof penetrations. 3. Remove gravel surface from the adjacent areas where new membrane will overlap 111 existing membrane with tie-in. 4. Prime exposed roof membrane with asphaltic primer and allow to dry completely. 5. Mechanically attach new polyisocyanurate insulation over separator sheet. 6. Adhere 1/2-inch cover board over new base insulation. 7. Install a 12-inch wide separator sheet adhered to deck and 4 inches out onto existing primed roof membrane to isolate new curbs from existing roof and insulation system. 8. Install 3 plies cold applied roof membrane over cover board. Extend plies 18 inches on to prepared existing roof membrane. Seal tie-off to existing membrane with 5 course striping detail. 9. Install elastomeric base flashing to all vertical projections. Surface with reflective aluminum. 10. Allow plies to cure for 21 days and surface roof with cold adhesive and gravel. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. C. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. D. Check projections, curbs, and deck for inadequate anchorage,foreign material, moisture, or unevenness that would prevent quality and execution of roofing system patching. I Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 51 00 -4 Printed 5/13/2013 I SECTION 07 51 00 IBUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING E. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. I 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Recut edges of repair areas as required to provide clean straight edges to abut repair to. B. Remove all aggregate to fully expose existing membrane for a minimum 24 inches surrounding Ipatch or tie-in areas. C. Coordinate with Work of Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry for installation of new wood curbs. I D. Coordinate with Work of other Sections for new roof penetrations required for cooler/freezer replacement. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP I A. Substrate: Free of foreign particles prior to laying roof membrane. B. Phased application not permitted. Complete all plies each day. C. Traffic and Equipment: Keep off completed plies until adhesive has set. ID. Wrapper and Packaging Materials: Not to be included in roofing system. E. Entrapped Aggregate: Not permitted within new membrane. Its discovery is sufficient cause for rejection. IF. Ply shall never touch ply, even at roof edges, laps, tapered edge strips, and cants. G. Cut out fishmouths/side laps which are not completely sealed and patch. Replace all sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded. 1 3.05 PROTECTION A. Roofing, flashings, membrane repairs, and insulation shall be installed and sealed in a in watertight manner on same day of installation or before arrival of inclement weather. il B. Preparation work shall be limited to those areas that can be covered with installed roofing material on same day or before arrival of inclement weather. C. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing'for storage, walking surface, and equipment movement. Move equipment and ground storage areas as work progresses. D. Protect building surfaces at set-up areas with tarpaulin. Secure tarpaulin. I E. At end of each working day, seal removal areas with water stops along edges to prevent water entry. F. Provide clean plywood walkways and take other precautions required to protect existing roof I areas and to prevent tracking of aggregate/debris from existing membrane into new work area where aggregate/debris pieces can be trapped within new roofing membrane. Instruct and police workers to ensure that aggregate/debris is not tracked into new work areas on workmen's shoes or equipment wheels. Discovery of entrapped aggregate/debris within new I membrane is sufficient cause for its rejection. 3.06 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. New insulation material shall have accurate dimensions and sufficient structural stability to I properly conform to the surfaces of the roof, cants, curbs, pipes, etc. Joints between boards shall be tight, except at junctions with all vertical surfaces and sumps,where 1/2 inch clearance shall be maintained. Protect insulation from the weather at all times. Lay no more insulation I than can be completely covered by a waterproofing membrane during the same day. A fully adhered base sheet course shall be considered to be a satisfactory weather barrier for no longer than 24 hours. Insulation that becomes wet during or after installation shall be removed and replaced with dry insulation. If the membrane has already been applied over such wet I insulation, then the roofing membrane shall also be replaced. All such replacement work shall be at no additional charge to the Owner. B. Conform to roofing manufacturer's written standards for installation over wood decks and Irequirements included herein. IProject No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 51 00 - 5 Printed 5/13/2013 SECTION 07 51 00 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING C. Apply insulation with long joints parallel to roof edges. All end joints shall be staggered at least twelve inches. D. Firmly butt each board to surrounding boards. Mechanically attach to structural deck. Drive fasteners flush to top surface. Install cover board over insulation, stagger joints; adhere in accordance with manufacturer's guidelines. E. Cut and fit boards where roof deck intersects vertical surfaces. I F. Filler boards require two fasteners per board, minimum. 1. Filler size: Eighteen inches in length or width, minimum. G. Fill any joints in the new insulation that are greater than 1/4-inch wide with mastic prior to application of roofing plies. H. Install insulation in thickness to provide top surface of infill insulation that is equal to or slightly higher(maximum 1/4-inch higher)than surface of surrounding roof surface. Remove and replace infill insulation that is lower in height than surrounding roof surface. I. Seat fasteners firmly in discs with fastener heads flush or below disc's top surface. 1. Length: Sufficient to accommodate roof insulation thickness and engage deck one inch minimum. J. Install one fastener per two square feet. K. No more insulation shall be applied than can be completely covered with the finished I membrane on the same day. L. Adhere cover board and tapered edge to base layers of insulation layers with insulation adhesive. ` 1. Adhere individual insulation boards in adhesive at rate of 2 gal per 100 sq ft. 2. Immediately walk boards in to place to ensure complete adhesion. 3. Weight down corners and centers of boards as necessary to allow no deformation of insulation boards while curing. 3.07 CANT INSTALLATION A. Bear cant full on roof deck and against vertical surfaces corners mitered. Place at all vertical surfaces or curbs and other locations where required. 3.08 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Prime prepared area of existing roof membrane with asphalt primer and allow to dry completely. I B. Install 12 inch wide separator sheet where indicated. C. Install minimum of three ply sheets, shingle fashion. Place ply sheets to ensure water will flow over or parallel to; but, never against exposed edges. D. Extend plies as required to cover patch area and finish by extending bottom ply 6 inches past edge of infill insulation out onto existing roof membrane, and each subsequent ply 6 inches farther on to existing roof. E. Extend the ends of all plies minimum 18 inches past repair area onto the existing roof membrane. F. Broom each ply into adhesive. Ensure complete and continuous seal and contact between111 bitumen and ply sheets, including ends, edges, and laps without wrinkles,fishmouths, or blisters. 1. Broom Width: Thirty-four inches minimum. 2. Avoid walking on plies until adhesive has set. G. Embed each ply in a uniform and continuous spray of mastic. 1. Interply rate: 2.5 gallons per 100 sq.ft. H. Lap ply sheet ends six inches. Stagger end laps twelve inches minimum. I. Seal reinforce all edges with four inch then six inch reinforcement plies set in mastic. Trowel apply finish mastic coat to be smooth. I Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 51 00 -6 Printed 5/13/2013 SECTION 07 51 00 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces of new plieswith plywood walk paths. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Representative: The material manufacturer's field representative will be responsible for: 1. Assistingin ascertainingconformance with the requirements of thesespecifications and to q theP ublished instructions of the material manufacturer. 2. Keeping Architect informed after periodic inspections as to the progress and quality of the work as observed. Providing written field reports after every inspection. 3. Calling to the attention of the Contractor and applicator those observed matters which he considers to be in conflict with requirements of specifications and/or published instructions of material manufacturer. 4. Supervising the taking of test cuts and the restoration of such area. 5. Certifying, after completion of the work and based on his observations and tests, his opinion as to the extent to which the applicator has complied with this specification, as well as to the published instructions of the material manufacturer. 6. The presence and activities of the material manufacturer's field representative will in no way relieve the Contractor or roofing installer of their contractual responsibilities. END OF SECTION • Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 51 00-8 Printed 5/13/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and other items indicated in Schedule. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Section 07 51 00-Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Cutting and patching of roofing systems 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for 1 Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. ASTM A653/A653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 1 C. ASTM A666-Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. D. ASTM B32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal. E. ASTM B749-Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. F. ASTM D1970-Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. G. ASTM D2244-Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences . from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. H. ASTM D4214-Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. I. ASTM D4479/D4479M-Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings-Asbestos-Free. J. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Insure that all parties whose work interfaces with roof system application are in attendance.These parties include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Owner. b. Architect. c. Contractor. • d. Contractor's superintendent. e. Sheet metal contractor. f. Roofing installer. g. Roofing manufacturer's representative. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement,thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that does not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 62 00- 1 Printed 5/13/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details,fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 10 years of documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit Installer's warranty, on Installer's standard or customized form, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of flashing and sheet metal against defects in materials and workmanship,for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel:ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.028 inch(24 gage)thick base metal. B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel:ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick base metal, unless otherwise indicated, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF(Polyvinylidene Fluoride)Coating:Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA • 2605; multiple coat,thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color:To match existing. C. Lead:ASTM B749, 4 lb/sq ft thick. D. Stainless Steel:ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper,0.025 inch(24 gage)thick, unless otherwise indicated; smooth No.4 finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners:Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers.Where exposed to view,finish to match color of metal being fastened. B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet(SAHTS): Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability:ASTM D1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 62 00-2 Printed 5/13/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3. Products: a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. c. Owens Coming;WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. d. Protecto Wrap Company; High Softening Point RainProof-40. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. C. Primer:Zinc chromate type. D. Protective Backing Paint:Asphaltic mastic,ASTM D 4479 Type I. II E. Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer and compatible with roofing materials. F. Solder:ASTM B32; Sn50(50/50)type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. C. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. { D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. Fabricate in sizes recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. E. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. F. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. G. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated.At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. 1. Standing Seams: 1-inch high with sealant at folded corners. 2. Solder-Lap Seams: 1-inch finish width; sweat full with solder. 3. Double S Lock Seams: Form 1-1/4 inch with S shaped seam on each edge of flashing sheet for concealed fastening. H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 62 00 -3 ►j Pnnted 5/13/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Install Work watertight and weathertight, without oil canning, buckles, tool marks,fastening stresses, distortion or defects which impair strength or mar appearance. C. Metal Protection:Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Underlayment:Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet. D. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. F. Install high-temperature self-adhered membrane(SAHTS)flashing where indicated. Install under curb flashing,extending a minimum of 3 inches down both sides over roofing base flashing. Apply primer if required by manufacturer.Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days or as required by underlayment manufacturer. G. Seal metal joints watertight. H. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact for flashings that are not prefinished. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. 1. Clean and flux metals prior to soldering. 2. Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for use. 3. Perform soldering slowly with a wall heated surface and fill with solder. 4. Do not solder coil-coated galvanized sheet steel. I. Pipe Counterflashing: Install counterfiashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim from the following materials of the minimum thicknesses indicated, unless otherwise required on the Drawings or to meet performance requirements. B. Roof-Penetration Flashing: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch (24 gage)thick. C. Gooseneck Flashing: 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch(24 gage)thick. D. Curb Flashing: 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. END OF SECTION Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 07 62 00 -4 Punted 51132013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gypsum wallboard. B. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02 41 19-Selective Structure Demolition: Removal of existing gypsum board to be replaced as Work of this Section. B. Section 0610 00-Rough Carpentry: Building framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M-Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. B. ASTM C840-Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. C. ASTM C1002-Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. D. ASTM C1047-Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. E. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board, and joint finishing system. ( 1. Indicate profiles and products for wall and ceiling trim accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Moisture test wood stud framing and confirm moisture content is less than specified for framing material in Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry. Do not commence installation until moisture content of framing is within tolerances. D. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 21 16 - 1 Punted 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. 2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers-Gypsum-Based Board: 1. CertainTeed Gypsum:www.certainteed.com/gypsum. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum:www.gpgypsum.com. 3. National Gypsum Company:www.nationalgypsum.com. 4. USG Corporation:www.usg.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Moisture Resistant Wallboard: 1. Application:Walls and ceilings in kitchen areas. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products: a. CertainTeed Gypsum; ProRoc Brand Moisture& Mold Resistant Gypsum Board with M2 Tech or M2Tech Gypsum Board or AirRenew Gypsum Board with M2Tech. b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board. c. USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 5. Glass-Mat-Faced Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 6. Unfaced Products: a. USG Corporation; Fiberock Aqua-Tough Interior Panels. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, paper-faced galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comerbead. 2. L-Bead: L-shaped;exposed long flange receives joint compound. 3. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. B. Joint Materials:ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 3. Chemical hardening type compound. C. Basecoat/Surfacer: Flat latex basecoat for use on surfaces indicated to receive Level 4 finish. Basecoat is in addition to primer specified in Section 09 90 00- Painting and Coating. 1. Products: a. "PrepRite High Build Interior Latex Primer/Surfacer", B28W601; Sherwin Williams. b. "SHEETROCK Brand Primer-Surfacer, Tuff-Hide; USG Corporation. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board:ASTM C1002;self-piercing tapping type. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 21 16 -2 Pnnted 5/8/2013 • SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. Start of wall and ceiling system Work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions within each area. B. Protection: Provide temporary covering to eliminate splattering of joint compound onto adjacent surfaces. 3.02 GYPSUM BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Installation on Wood Framing: 1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment. D. Moisture Protection:Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 1. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 2. L-Bead: Use at all exposed terminations of gypsum board, at all floor joints and joints to receive sealants. 3.04 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, except as indicated below and as follows: 1. Level 4:Walls and ceilings at all public areas. a. Apply one coat of specified basecoat/surfacer to entire surface at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate of mil thickness. b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating and are in addition to basecoat/surfacer. 2. Level 1:Wall areas above finished ceilings and permanently concealed areas, whether or not accessible in the completed construction, except provide a higher level of finish as to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings. D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION • Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 21 16-3 ( Punted 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS • A. ASTM E648-Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. ASTM F710-Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. ASTM F1066-Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. D. ASTM F1861 -Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. E. ASTM F1869-Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. F. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. G. CAL(CHPS LEM)-Low-Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for High Performance Schools(CHPS). H. GEI (SCH)-GREENGUARD "Children and Schools"Certified Products; GREENGUARD Environmental Institute. I. NFPA 253-Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association. J. SCS (CPD)-SCS Certified Products;Scientific Certification Systems. K. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. 1. Provide product data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. C. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub floor is acceptable. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Flooring Material: 10 square feet of each type and color. 3. Extra Wall Base: 10 linear feet of each type and color. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 72 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 68 degrees F. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 65 00 -1 Panted 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING C. Moisture Testing: Maintain temperatures and humidity expected during normal use for testing. If this is not possible, then the test conditions should be 75+/-10 deg F and 50 +/- 10 percent relative humidity. Maintain these conditions 48 hours prior to and during testing. D. Close spaces to traffic during resilient flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile VCT-1: Homogeneous,with color extending throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux(CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648. 3. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following: a. GreenGuard Children and Schools;www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore;www.scscertified.com. c. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 5. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 6. Color:As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 7. Manufacturer: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Product Standard Excelon: www.armstrong.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base:ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber,vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux(CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. Height: 6 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 4. Finish: To match existing. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: Black. 7. Manufacturer: a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. b. Flexco, Inc.:www.flexcofloors.com. c. Johnsonite, Inc.:www.johnsonite.com. d. Roppe Corp:www.roppe.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: Portland cement based;type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers,Adhesives, and Seaming Materials:Waterproof;types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. VCT Adhesives: Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). 2. Rubber Floor Adhesives Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 60 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 65 00 -2 Printed 5/8/2013 f . SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 3 EXECUTION I3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer,free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface ihardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. C. Install resilient flooring material and accessories after other finishing operations, including 1 painting, have been completed. 3.02 PREPARATION I A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710. 1 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. { 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform the following tests: Proceed with installation only after l substrates pass testing. a. Anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq.ft. ! in 24 hours. { b. Perform additional tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 1 C. Relative Humidity Testing: Perform testing of relative humidity in concrete slabs for file tests in accordance with ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. f 1. The relative humidity measured from the center of the concrete slab should not exceed 75 percent. f D. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth,flat, hard surface. iE. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. F. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. E. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. F. Fit joints tightly. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 65 00-3 .s Pnnted 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING G. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets,floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay out tiles to align with existing. C. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. 1. Discard broken,cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,thresholds, and nosings. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3.05 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners.At external corners, 'V'cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Perform initial maintenance on installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction site debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended by flooring manufacturer. 2. Sweep vacuum floor after installation. 3. Do not perform initial maintenance for a minimum of 5 days after installation has been completed to allow the adhesive the proper time to set. 4. Damp mop flooring to remove black marks and soil. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 65 00 -4 Printed 5/8/2013 I SECTION 09 90 00 f PAINTING AND COATING SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL i 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems indicated as "P"(Paint)on the following substrates: I1. Gypsum board. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, { Architect will select from colors and finishes scheduled for other areas of the project. II C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 1 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of I equipment. { 5. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 DEFINITIONS 1 A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. i1 B. Paint Gloss and Sheen: Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following MPI values. Field verify gloss to match existing. Gloss Level Description Units a 60 Degrees Units•CD_85 Degrees i G5 Semi-Gloss Finish 35 to 70 t 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. ( B. ASTM D16-Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications. C. "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. • B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: , 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, provide three 8-inch by 10- inch color drawdowns with texture to simulate actual conditions, and representing color and sheen. D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. . E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1. At project completion, provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 90 00- 1 •y Pnnted 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. All extra stock containers are to be new and unopened. 3. Label each container with color, type, room locations, and sheen in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.Agenda items will include field conditions, substrate conditions,coordination of shop applied primers with finish coatings, application methods, and field quality control testing and inspection, schedule of painting applications and notifications to Owner of start of painting operations. 1. Bring copies of reviewed color draw-downs for all required colors. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"and paint manufacturer's recommendations for products and paint systems indicated. B. Surface Preparation: Obtain written confirmation of the specific surface preparation procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator(s)to ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before painting any such work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Products: Provide one of the products listed in Part 2. C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions(shown in parentheses)of the following manufacturers'names are used in Part 2: 1. Coronado Paint(Coronado) 2. Glidden Professional (GP)(Formally ICI Paints)/Devoe High Performance Coatings (Devoe). 3. Kelly-Moore Paints(Kelly). 4. Miller Paint Co. (Miller). 5. Benjamin Moore&Co. (Moore). Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 90 00 -2 Printed 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 6. Parker Paint/Comex USA(Parker). 7. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 8. Rodda Paint/Cloverdale Paint Co. (Rodda). 9. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). D. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS-GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under 11 conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D—National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for. j ! Architectural Coatings. 1) Nonflat Paints, Coatings are not included, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24),exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site;or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di(2- ethyihexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene,formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene(methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. D. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. E. Colors:As follows 1. P-1: To match existing. 2. Extend paint to natural break in plane to disguise patches. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS- INTERIOR A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Latex Primer Sealer 40-11. 2) GP: Ultra Hide 1412 Primer Sealer. 3) Kelly: 95-100 Pre-Cote Wallboard & Masonry Primer/Sealer. 4) Miller: 6020 Premium H.B. PVA. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Primer N534. 6) Parker: UltraTech C152 Latex Primer/Sealer. 7) PPG: 6-2 Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer. . 8) Rodda: Heavy Body Scotseal 507801. Profect No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 90 00-3 Printed 5/13/2013 • SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 9) S-W: Contractors Interior Latex Primer B28WF0162. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss,acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 32 Line. 2) GP: Ultra Hide 1416 Acrylic S.G. Enamel. 3) Kelly: 1050 KM Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. • 4) Miller: 4580 Premium Semi-Gloss. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 N539. 6) Parker: UltraTech C119 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-500 Speedhide Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 8) Rodda: Unique II Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel 542001. 9) S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31 Series. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers,cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not;commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished, with Applicator present, prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. D. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 1. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. F. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. G. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. H. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 90 00 -4 Printed 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING I. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. If spray equipment is utilized, a spray/backroll application is considered one coat of paint. 3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 4. Continue paint finish behind all wall-mounted items. B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to Architect. 1. Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, or foreign materials in paint coatings. 2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners, reentrant angles or similar conditions. 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause. 4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the weather. 5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants(dust, spray paint,etc.). B. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces: 1. Visible defects are evident on vertical or horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 39 inches. 2. Visible defects are evident on ceilings, soffits and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles. 3. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen texture and hiding across full surface area. 4. Dry mil thicknesses do not meet manufacturer's recommended thickness or specified thickness. C. Owner may provide field inspection and testing. 1. Painted surfaces will be tested for dry mil thickness for each coat. 2. Shop primers and painted surfaces will be tested for adhesion. 3. Surfaces will be tested at frequency discussed in the preinstallation conference and as deemed appropriate by Owner. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 90 00-5 .j Printed 5/8/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. 3.07 SCHEDULE-INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Board -Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish. END OF SECTION • Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 09 90 00-6 Punted 5/812013 1 SECTION 10 26 01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS SECTION 10 26 01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall and Corner Guards: 1. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com. ( 2. Construction Specialties, Inc.:www.c-sgroup.com. 3. InPro Corporation:www.inprocorp.com. 4. Korogard Wall Protection Systems:www.korogard.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Corner Guards-Surface Mounted: Extruded one-piece unit without splices, installed with ( adhesive. 1. Material:Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 2. Thickness: 16 gage, 0.06 inch. 3. Width of Wings: 3-1/2 inches. 4. Height Above Finished Floor:48 inches. 5. Styles: Provide 90 degree corners. 6. Available Products: a. Babcock-Davis; Product CG-SS304: www.babcockdavis.com. b. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Product Model CO-8: www.c-sgroup.com. c. InPro Corporation; Product Model 180: www.inprocorp.com. d., Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Product GS35:www.korogard.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. B. Fully adhere surface mounted corner guards to wall surface using manufacturer's recommended VOC compliant adhesive. C. Position corner guards from top of base to height specified. END OF SECTION N Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 10 26 01 - 1 Pnnted 5/7/2013 I SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT I PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK THIS SECTION ' A. General Requirements: Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including I General and other Conditions and other Division 01 —General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Work includes furnishing and installing all food service equipment as indicated on drawings. C. Provide all equipment as scheduled on drawings, listed in schedules and specified, Ifabricated or purchased. D. Provide location for breaker panel and convenient utility access through custom fabricated equipment for connections by Others as required. i I E. Reuse Owner's existing equipment located on site. Disconnect, remove and protect equipment from damage during the construction process. Reinstall equipment per remodel plan, verify utility connections and modify as indicated. I F. Relocate Owner's existing equipment, not to be reused from Owner's existing equipment, not to be reused from construction area and store in Owner's selected location on site. i G. General Contractor support work in this section, including blocking and backing plates as required. H. Work Furnished But Not Installed: 1. The following items are furnished loose, in Original Equipment Manufacturer boxes, ready for installation by the appropriate trade only on equipment supplied ' under this Section. 2. Items under Division 22 are: Sink faucets, sink wastes with 1" minimum tail piece, rinse sprays, mixing faucets, aerators, solenoid valves and brackets. s Quick disconnect devices, with restraints, for all mobile equipment. i 3. Items under Division 26 are: Solenoid valves, aquastat timers, on/off switches, a junction boxes, cover plates, control panels and components needed for mounting on unit such as brackets,threaded stems and lock nuts. Electrical cords and 90-degree angle male plugs for all mobile equipment. is 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Plumbing and HVAC—Division 22 and 23: 1. Plumbing and ventilation work required in connection with foodservice equipment unless specifically called for in Part 2—Products, or Part 3—Execution, of this Section 11 40 00. , . 2. Rough-in points indicated on Mechanical drawings. 3. Final connecting from roughing-in point to various pieces of equipment requiring such connection. 4. All traps, grease traps, valves, stops, shut-offs and fittings necessary. ` . 5. Necessary flues and/or vents of size and capacity. 6. Reduce pressure positive backflow preventers. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-1 .i Pnnted 05/08/13 SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT B. Electrical—Division 26: 1. Electrical work required in connection with foodservice equipment unless specifically called for in Part 2—Products,or Part 3-Execution of this Section 11 40 00. 2. Rough-in to points indicated on Electrical drawings. 3. Final connecting from roughing-in point to various pieces of equipment requiring such connections. 4. Lines, switches, safety cutouts,fuse boxes, and other electrical controls,fittings and connections unless specifically called for in these specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Product Data brochure to show manufacturer's specifications, diagrams and instructions for manner in which utility connections will be made. 2. Include manufacturer's specification sheets to be accompanied by typewritten or printed sheet listing item number, items description, quantity, manufacturer's name, address model number and pertinent notes relative to items being furnished. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Elevation and Plan views to be in 3/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. 2. Dimensional data specified left to right x front to back x height(or depth)when facing equipment from operator's side. 3. Clearly indicate materials, components,fasteners, hardware, equipment, finishes, method of installation and assembly, supplementary support of bracing controls and utilities rough-in. 4. Obtain reproducible copies of rough-in and connection drawings from Architect, review and modify as necessary for project conditions. Clearly note all changes and submit with shop drawings. 5. Show location and size of all blocking required for installation of equipment. C. Deliver all submittal materials for review as one complete package. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualified Bidders: 1. Boxer Northwest, 503-226-1188 2. Curtis Restaurant Equipment, 541-746-7480 3. Duray, 360-575-1968 4. Smith&Green, 503-258-0858 5. Other Bidders, meeting qualifications in next paragraph, shall be reviewed by Foodservice Consultant in conjunction with Architect prior to submission of bid by General Contractor. B. Qualification of Fabricator/Installer: 1. Fabricator/installer maintains personnel and facilities totally engaged in design, fabrication and provision of foodservice equipment of type and size specified on this project. 2. Installation of foodservice equipment performed only by personnel thoroughly familiar and trained to the manufacture's recommended method of installation. 3. Provide a least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required. This person shall be completely familiar with the requirements Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-2 Pnnted 05/08/13 fY SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT of this work and who shall personally direct all installation performed under this Section of these Specifications. I C. Code and Regulatory Compliance: Regulations, Reference and Standards: Comply with the following applicable codes and ordinances, regulations, references, specifications and standards, in effect thirty(30)days prior to bid due date: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. American National Standard Institute(ANSI). 3. America Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME). 4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 5. American Society Testing and Materials(ASTM). 6. National Electrical Code(NEC). 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 9. National Science Foundation (NSF). 10. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 11. State of Oregon Health Codes, Chapter 333, Administrative Rules. 12. Energy Star. • 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product Control: 1. Do not deliver material or assemblies to Site until installation spaces are ready to receive installation. 2. Wrap and crate finished components and assemblies at factory to prevent damage or marring of assemblies or surfaces during shipping and handling. 3. Deliver all equipment in one piece,when impractical deliver in largest sections and field assemble as continuous unit without obvious joints, by butt-welding and through-bolting. 4. Deliver all items with protective covering and protect work of other trades on project. 5. Cover and protect work form damage through times of construction until inspected and accepted. 6. Coordinate work with other trades and provide necessary layouts. Plumbing and electrical items furnished, but not installed, boxed and clearly identified for location and use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Kitchen Equipment Contractor will be responsible for changes in rough-ins or utilities resulting from kitchen equipment deviations or substitutions. 1.07 SUBSTITUTES A. Substitutes apply to this Section only as indicated under Section 11 40 00 Equipment Schedule and in the Instruction to Bidders Section to the specifications documents. B. All substitute requests will be reviewed for quality comparisons to the specific item specified, appropriate to the project conditions and operational intent of the Owner. 1.08 WARRANTY „" A. Warrant the work of this Section, including refrigeration systems,for one year from date of Substantial Completion of Project against defect in materials and workmanship under normal use and service. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-3 Printed 05/08/13 SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT B. Repair or replace defective work at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Provide five year extended warranty of all refrigeration system compressors. D. Owner's existing equipment will be retained in"as is"condition and protected from any construction damage. Warranty will not apply. 1.09 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Assemble and deliver,to the Owner, at the time of start up, binders containing the following information, indexed and cataloged on each item of equipment. Provide binders in quantity as indicated under previous sections of these specifications. 1. Serial number in quantity specified. 2. Service and maintenance literature from Manufacturer. 3. Warranty certificates with copy of warranty card properly filled out. 4. Manufacturer's service agency for authorized warranty work. 5. Workman's warranty and agent for all custom fabricated equipment. 6. Start-Up Log, dated and signed including any notes, by Original Equipment Manufacturer certified representatives and Owner's representative. 7. Field inspection report on all Class 1 hoods and fire protection systems from the Original Equipment Manufacturer certified representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Other manufacturer's products of equal or greater quality than those specified in this Section may be used. Submit request for substitution approval before the bid in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Metals in U.S. standard gauges and material appropriate to condition: 1. Stainless steel type 304 with#4 finish on exposed surfaces and#2B for concealed surfaces. 2. Stainless steel tubing to be not less than 16 gauge finished to match stainless steel sheets per ASTMA 554. 3. Galvanized steel in 14 gauge minimum per ASTMA 527. 4. Galvannealed steel in 16 gauge minimum per ASTMA 525 prepared for final coatings. B. Refrigeration: 1. All refrigeration lines to be refrigerant grade ACR or type"L"copper tubing soldered with silver solder and/or sil-fos(15 percent silver). 2. Insulate all lines with 1/2 inch thick flexible pipe insulation applied with adhesive. Provide insulating materials approved for use in return air plenum enclosure. 3. Refrigerant gases will be used that are appropriate to the applied temperature condition, meet applicable codes for use and are handled per the"Code of Good Practice for the Reduction of Emissions of Chlorofluorocarbons" Report EUR 9509 EN. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Hardware: Stainless steel or heavy duty chrome plated brass unless otherwise specified, studded securely to metal bodies, or welded, ground smooth and polished. Unless noted otherwise, include the following: Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-4 Printed 05/08/13 I , SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 1. Drawer: Self-Closing, full extension type, constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel. Angle cradle and front with full-length integral pull with double wall drawer face with rigid insulation. Housing: Rubber bumper stop at each end and closed bottom with front edge flush. Slides: Component Hardware S52 Series of Standard-Keil 1452. Load bearing capacity to be not less than 200 pounds. Thermoplastic Insert Pan: Component Hardware S80 Series or Standard-Keil 1480 Series, Pan to be removable without the use of tools. Dimension: 20"L x 20"W x 5"D. 2. Hinges: Heavy duty, chrome plated brass or die stamped stainless steel concealed hospital type offset butt hinges with concealed fasteners. 3. Adjustable heavy duty foot inserts for round tubing in stainless steel finish typical to Standard-Keil#1012-1001-1144 for 1 5/8 inch round stainless steel tube. 4. Heavy duty leg sockets in stainless steel typical Standard-Keil#1020-0206-1283 for 1 5/8 inch round stainless steel tube. 5. Casters to be by Jarvis Caster Group with fixed or swivel mounting, gray polyurethane wheels, "Posi-Loc"toe brake in sizes and load capacities indicated. 6. Quick disconnect,flexible connections with restraint device for water and gas by Dormont Manufacturing Corp. or Avtec Manufacturing. 7. Electrical cords and male plugs will meet the power needs as specified by the equipment and be supplied with 90 degree angle plug by Hubbell. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Equipment to be fabricated in gauges as follows: 1. Tops with connecting end splash, back splash or edges to be of 14 gauge stainless steel. Apply sound deadening material. 2. Sink bowls to be formed from 14 gauge stainless steel.Apply sound deadening material. 3. Wall shelves and bottom shelves to be of 16 gauge stainless steel.Apply sound deadening material. 4. Counter backs, ends and drawer enclosures to be of 20 gauge stainless steel. 5. End Caps, Corner Guards and Column Wraps to be of 20 gauge stainless steel. B. Equipment to be constructed in a strong manner with reinforcing, bracing and welding for rigidity. Top, exterior panels and doors to be of a single sheet sizes as dimensions permit. 1. Tops and under shelves to be braced with 14 gauge galvanized iron"U"or hat channels. 2. Bolts, screws, nuts,washers to be same metal as items fastened. Where dissimilar metals are attached,fasteners will be of the higher grade metal. Spacing to insure suitable fastening and prevent material bulging. Rivets A_ prohibited as fasteners. 3. Equipment surfaces fastened with concealed fasteners to framework or adjacent items. Accessible bolt threads to be capped with acorn nut and lock washer. Surface depressions from weld studs are unacceptable. C. Welding by A.W.S. Standards heliarc method with welding rod same composition as parts welded. Exposed joints continuously welded to appear as one piece construction. 1. Directionally grind and polish all welds to match factory finish, smooth, without depressions or metal discolorations. 2. Finished equipment gauge thickness will not vary more than five percent from U.S. standard gauges. w` 3. Brake bends, sheared edges will not mar uniform appearance of the material, texture at bend or edge burrs polished to smooth uniform condition. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-5 Pnnted 05/08/13 SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT D. Cabinet Work 1. Equipment to be constructed in a strong manner with reinforcing and bracing for strength. Flat surface construction of single panels as dimensions permit. 2. Joinery by dado, rabbet,tongue and groove, splined, half-lapped glued and nailed or tight joint fastened. 3. Polyvinyl or white liquid glue on all plywood and wood joints, securely clamped during curing process,joints wiped clean of excess glue. 4. Bond plastic laminate to surfaces and edges, subject to prolonged heat, by pressure and/or heat cure method utilizing adhesive. Pressure sensitive contact adhesives used on all remaining plastic laminate surfaces. Adhesives approved by manufacturer of plastic laminate specified. Adhesives shall comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District(SCAQMD) Rule # 1168. 5. Plastic laminate edge banding to be overlapped by adjoining surface laminate. Vertical surface laminate applied before horizontal surface laminate. 6. Trim all exposed plastic laminate edges with twenty-five degree bevel bit. Inside corners, or cut-outs, on continuous plastic laminate surface to have 1/8 inch minimum corner radius and smooth edges to eliminate stress cracking. 7. Single thickness plywood panels, integrally unsupported,to be backed with plastic laminate of equal thickness and similarity to face laminate. 8. Exposed plywood surfaces in cabinet interior to be covered with plastic laminate cabinet liner in color complimentary to exterior plastic laminate. 2.05 UTILITY SERVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish equipment with access panels and utility channels to allow piping or wiring by Contractor. Coordinate this work to meet utility service requirements. 1. Construct equipment to allow required utility connections to be made or disconnected without damaging or dismantling of equipment. 2. Electrical outlets, switches and receptacles to be mounted on fabricated equipment ready for wiring and final connections by Contractor. 3. Special receptacles required to match cord and caps furnished on fabricated or buy out equipment will be provided by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor. 4. Provide identification labels on all switches furnished with fabricated equipment. Engraved plates,white with black letters, overall size 1/2 inch x 2 inch will be bonded to equipment and secured with screws. B. Locate water inlets at least six inches above positive water level to prevent siphoning of liquids into water system, suitable check valves, vacuum breakers to be provided by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor for installation by Others. Reduced pressure positive back flow preventers when required by code authorities will be supplied under Division 22. C. Equipment to operate without objectionable sound or vibrations, correction of objectionable conditions will be the subjective opinion of the Owner and will be performed at no additional cost. Modifications to provide efficient and stable operation of heated and motor operated equipment to be indicated on shop submittals. 2.06 WALK-IN BOXES A. General:Walk-in coolers or freezers provided under this portion of specifications shall be prefabricated of modular design and construction. They shall be designed to allow convenient and accurate field assembly. B. Panel Fabrication: 1. Standard wall, ceiling, and floor panels shall be custom built for exact sizing requirements. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-6 Pnnted 05/08/13 SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 2. Panels shall consist of foamed-in-place urethane insulation, sandwiched between interior and exterior metal"skin"which has been die-formed and gauged for uniformity in size. 3. Edges of panels shall be foamed-in-place tongue and groove with locking facilities foamed-in-place at time of fabrication. C. Insulation: Insulation shall be full five(5)inches thick, UL Class 1 rigid foamed-in-place polyurethane with a minimum 2.0 cubic foot density. The"K"factor shall be no more than 0.125 BTU per hour per square foot, per inch thickness, per degree Fahrenheit of temperature difference. Heat transfer"U"factor shall not exceed 0.033. The"R"value shall be a minimum of 40. Insulation shall be 95%closed cell structure. Flame spread rating according to ASTME-84/UL 723 shall be 25 or less. Polyurethane foam shall be expanded with 245fa. Insulation containing ozone depleting CFC's or HCFC's will not be acceptable. D. Panel Locking Assemblies: Assembly of walk-in shall be accomplished by Posi-Locs. Posi-Locs shall be foamed-in-place and activated by a hex wrench provided by the manufacturer. Access ports to locking devices shall be covered by snap caps. Access ports shall be interior to allow assembly of walk-in from the outside. ( E. Section Gaskets: N.S.F. listed gaskets shall be foamed-in-place to the male side of all panels, on both interior and exterior. Gaskets shall be impervious to stains, greases, oils, mildew, etc. F. Entrance Door and Door Panel: Each walk-in shall be fitted with one standard 36"x 78" swing-type door. The door shall be flush type, stainless steel. Doors and door section shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and equipped with the following: 1. Door shall be equipped with magnetic gasket, Posi-Seal door closure and latch to open the door by breaking the magnetic force of the gasket. Hardware has provisions for locking and a safety release,which prevents entrapment of personnel within the box. 2. Door shall be self-closing with three strap-type, cam lift hinges mounted to 10 gauge galvanized backing plates. 3. Door jamb shall be made of extruded PVC and steel reinforced perimeters on the door frame and door plug. An isolated, low wattage heater strip covered by magnetically attracting stainless steel shall be fitted onto this jamb.This strip shall provide perfect sealing of magnetic gasket and prevent frost and condensation build-up. 4. Each entrance door section shall be provided with a junction box in lieu of incandescent light, pilot light switch, and rigid conduit between switch box and ( outlet box.Concealed wiring shall be standard on each entrance door section. 5. A heavy gauge threshold with non-skid stripping shall be provided with each door section. Heater wire shall continue beneath the threshold. 6. Provide door with 0.10 diamond tread kick plate inside and outside. 7. Provide vinyl strip curtains for all entrance doors. G. Partitions: Fabrication and finish of partition walls shall be the same as the walk-in walls and shall lock into wall, ceiling, and/or floor panels with Posi-Loc assemblies. Tongue and groove foam fabrication shall provide the thermal break between cooler and freezer compartments. Heater wires not required. H. N.S.F. Approval: All walk-ins shall be fabricated to comply with National Sanitation Foundation No. 7. The N.S.F. label shall be affixed to the interior door pan. All interior corners, including floor and ceiling, shall be coved. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-7 Pnnted 05/08/13 • SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT I. Installation Instructions: A complete set of installation instructions shall be included with the walk-in.These instructions shall cover the erection and assembly of the walk-in.A floor plan print shall be included. 2.07 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. Provide refrigeration systems as specified and as required to provide complete and satisfactory systems hooked up, tested and operational. B. Provide refrigerants approved for use under the EPA clean air act at time of installation. All systems will be charged with synthetic lubricants congruous with both"charged" refrigerant and future refrigerant mandated for change by EPA. C. Refrigerant type ARC drain and condenser water piping constructed of adequately supported Type 1 hard-drawn, seamless copper tubing with silver soldered joints. Insulate all refrigerant lines with 3/4 inch Armstrong Armaflex insulation applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide a dehydrator, liquid line sight glass, shut-off valve, liquid line solenoid, thermostatic expansion valve,filters, separators at each evaporator, time clocks and other fittings and accessories as required on each system. D. Refrigerant lines: Size and install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and good practice as set for the in the ASHRAE Guide and Data Book. All work shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner. 1. Run lines grouped and labeled with item serviced. 2. Support lines from building and walk-in box with seismic bracing code. E. Wrap electric heater cable around blower coil condensate drains where temperatures are expected to be 34 degrees Fahrenheit or lower temperature. F. Control the temperature for each unit by means of a thermostat wired to actuate a solenoid valve in the liquid line, with the compressor operation controlled by the low- pressure switch. Adjust thermostats and low-pressure controls to maintain the box temperatures indicated. G. Clean and dehydrate the entire system by maintaining a vacuum of 250 microns or lower for a period of five hours. Add the required operating charge of refrigerant and oil. 2.08 GENERAL APPEARANCE A. All fabricated items must retain a uniformity of overall appearance consistent with the quality level specified. B. All work to be corrected to the highest quality level if visual appearance indicates inconsistency in the skill level of fabrication. C. All defective work to be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.09 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE A. Refer to Equipment Schedule on Drawings for all equipment under this Section. Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-8 Pnnted 05108/13 1 . SECTION 11 40 00 { FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Item 1 Description: Walk In Cold Storage Manufacturer: Imperial Manufacturing Model: Freezer/Cooler Combo, Modular panel cold storage room complete in configuration shown on plan with cam lock roof. Refer to drawing sheet FS 1.01, 3.01 &3.02. Accessories: Each room shall incorporate the following: a. Provide Self-Closing Flush Mounted Cooler and Freezer Doors, Model G3, 36"x 78", 22 gauge stainless steel interior&exterior with Thermosteel backing, 36"H 0.10 aluminum diamond tread kick plate, 14"x 14" insulated view windows with heat for freezer. Doors hinged as shown on plan. Include the following: is Hinges, Kason, Model 1248A, Quantity Three. ii: Handles, Kason, Model 27C, dead bolt lock with inside release and padlock provision. iii: Magnetic Gasket. iv: Door Snubbers, Kason, Model 1094. v: Install two(2) Modularm75LC Walk-in Alarm &Light Manager systems with digital temperature display and audible alarm. Units are to be flush mounted with concealed conduit terminating above ceiling panels. vi: One(1)each Low and Normal Temp Chase Doors Strip curtain, with 6"strips at 25% overlap. vii: 14 gauge stainless steel threshold for Freezer and Cooler. viii: Install Heated Air Vent for Freezer, Kason, Model 1832 SS. b. Freezer: Exposed Interior shall be Stucco Aluminum finish with trim, radius corners, closed gasket and angle screed connection to floor. Exposed Exterior shall be 22 gauge stainless steel 304#4 finish. Unexposed Exterior shall be 26 gauge stucco galvanized finish. c. Cooler: Exposed Interior shall be 22 gauge stainless steel 304#4 finish with trim, radius corners, closed gasket and angle screed connection to floor. Exposed Exterior shall be 22 gauge stainless steel 304#4 finish. Unexposed Exterior shall be 26 gauge stucco galvanized finish. d. Ceiling: Exposed Interior shall be Stucco White Aluminum finish for both rooms. e. Insulation shall be 5"thick, Class 4, urethane insulation. f. Furnish and install stainless steel ceiling closure panels and vertical closure trim to match finish and grain of exposed exterior, using no exposed fasteners. is Provide four(4)48"L covered LED Fixtures with LED lamps for cooler or freezer application. g. 4"x 4"J-box on interior wall panel behind evaporator coils with concealed conduit connecting to terminal J-box at top of wall panel for manual evaporator fan switch. is SWITCH AND CONNECTIONS BY DIVISION 26. h. Refrigeration Control System, Heatcraft, Model Beacon II Smart Controller. Include the following: Smart II Software Package for monitoring and recording at Personal Computer on site. ii: Locate this system away from high vibration equipment preferably in the • Kitchen Office. CONNECTIONS BY DIVISION 26. iii: DIVISION 26 COORDINATE RELAY TO CENTRALIZED MONITORING SYSTEM AS REQUIRED BY OWNER. i. ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUIT SHALL RUN CONCEALED WITHIN WALK IN WALLS OR ABOVE THE CEILING PANEL. j. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH GENERAL CONTACTOR. k. DIVISION 22 AND 26 FURNISH PENETRATIONS AS NEEDED AND SEAL WITH FOAM AND ESCUTCHEON PLATE. I. FIELD CONNECTIONS BY DIVISION 26. m. FREEZER PIT BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR COMPLETE WITH CLASS 1 INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIER AND SEALED WITH ASPHALT EMULSION. PIT INSULATION MATERIAL PROVIDED BY KEC Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-9 Pnnted 05/08/13 SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Furnished: KEC Item 2 Description: Freezer Compressor Manufacturer: Heatcraft Model: MOZ025L63S, Indoor/Outdoor Remote, ©-10°F Storage with R404 low temp refrigerant. Accessories: Include the following: a. Beacon II Control System. b. 24 Volt Coil Compressor Contactor. c. Four Year Extended Warranty. Furnished: KEC Item 3 Description: Freezer Evaporator Manufacturer: Heatcraft Model: LSFO-EC Accessories: Include the following: a. Electronically Commutated Fan Motors. b. Electric Defrost Evaporator, Solid State Temp Sensors. c. Electric Expansion Valve w/Stepper Motor. d. Beacon II Control Board w/LED Display. e. Pressure Transducer.Suction Sensor. f. 24 Volt Transformer. g. Heated Cable to wrap Drain Line. h. DRAIN TO FLOOR SINK BY DIVISION 22. Furnished: KEC Item 4 Description: Cooler Evaporator Manufacturer: Heatcraft Model: LSC090SA-EC Accessories: Include the following: a. Electronically Commutated Fan Motor. b. Air Defrost Evaporator, Solid State Temp Sensors. c. Electric.Expansion Valve. d. Beacon II Control Board w/LED Display. e. 24 Volt Transformer. f. DRAIN TO FLOOR SINK BY DIVISION 22. Furnished: KEC Item 5 Description: Cooler Compressor, Heatcraft Indoor/Outdoor Remote, @ 35°F Storage and R404 low temp refrigerant. Manufacturer: Heatcraft Model: MOH010X63S Accessories: Include the following: a. Beacon II Control System. b. 24 Volt Compressor Coil Contactor. c. Four Year Extended Warranty. Furnished: KEC Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-10 Printed 05/08/13 SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1. Verify all dimensions with measurements in the field before fabrication. 2. Confirm passage of equipment to installation locations. Advise Architect of anticipated difficulties prior to site delivery of equipment. 3. Verify rough-in location and capacity of utility service connections. B. Installation: 1. Install, assemble, level and complete work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. „ Insure that floor drains are accurately located to drain rough-in. 3. Install refrigeration units in locations indicated and in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Cut holes, seal or trim for installation of plumbing, electrical by Contractor. Holes to be finished with stainless steel or chrome plated escutcheon plates or plastic grommets as appropriate to match surface with insulation as needed. 5. Install ceiling,wall or closure trim between equipment and building surfaces. 6. Seal recesses in top of curbs, seal joints and services through wall and ceilings to provide moisture and vapor seal using Dow Corning 100 silicone rubber, general purpose aluminum sealant. 7. Installation of walk-in box assemblies to be furnished only by the Original Manufacturer or manufacturer's approved agent. 3.02 CLEANING, TESTING,ADJUSTING AND DEMONSTRATING A. Cleaning and Adjusting: 1. Remove masking protection from stainless steel and other finished surfaces. 2. Adjust equipment doors to operate smoothly without binding. 3. Polish out, remove or replace damaged equipment surfaces. 4. Shut off equipment, controls and lock doors to prevent operation or access by unauthorized personnel. 5. Leave entire installation clean and free from defects at time of substantial completion. 6. Remove surplus materials, debris and tools from Site. B. Testing and Demonstrating New Equipment: 1. Test, clean and adjust equipment and apparatus installed to insure performance will meet the intent of these Specifications. 2. Operate refrigeration equipment over a continuous seventy-two hour period and test for a full range of functions. 3. Adjust and retest any refrigeration equipment not meeting requirements. 4. Test all foodservice equipment to meet operational requirements. 5. Adjust and retest any equipment not meeting requirements. 6. Demonstrate, in the presence of the Owner and Food Facilities Consultant the operation function and maintenance of each item of equipment. Include signed , , log of completed Start-Ups with Operations Manual. 7. Representatives from authorized service agencies,factory or Original Equipment Supplier will demonstrate initial start-up, operation, clean-up preventative maintenance and safety procedures of their equipment. END OF SECTION Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District MAY 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 11 40 00-11 Punted 05/08/13 SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the plumbing work specified in this Division. B. The requirements of this Section apply to the plumbing systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 22 sections. C. Provide all items,articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits,fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. D. The work shalt include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Modify routing of storm sewer line for new freezer box. 2. Connect freezer/cooler box refrigerant lines. 3. Install condensate lines for freezer/cooler box equipment. 4. Install freezer and cooler compressor units as detailed. E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the label of a recognized testing laboratory such as UL or CSA. } [ B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard,the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: 1. Federal Specifications(FS) 2. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(NEMA) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. Factory Mutual (FM) 7. International Building Code(IBC)with State and Local Amendments 8. International Mechanical Code(IMC)with State and Local Amendments 9. Uniform Plumbing Code(UPC)with State and Local Amendments 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 12. International Fire Code (IFC)with State and Local Amendments 13. Energy Policy Act(EPAct) Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-1 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 14. Manufacturers Standardization Society(MSS) 15. National Sanitation Foundation(NSF) 16. American Gas Association (AGA) D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same. manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make,type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. G. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other specification divisions. H. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipments UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. 1.03 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification. 1.04 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions. B. HVAC piping systems,fuel piping systems,fire suppression piping systems, and control devices and control wiring relating to the heating and air conditioning systems are specified under other Divisions of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein. C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid. D. All sections of Division 22 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 22. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-2 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS ( 1,05 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION A. Materials other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted. 1.06 CHANGE ORDERS A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. 1.07 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Project Record(As-Installed)Drawings: 1. Maintain a set of record drawings on the job site as directed in Division 1. 2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. 3. Record and accurately indicate the following: a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping and all cleanouts, whether concealed or exposed, dimensioned from permanent building features. b. Locations of all valves with assigned tag numbers. c. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions, etc. Eradicate extraneous information. d. Locations of tracer wire terminal points. e. Model numbers of installed equipment. 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. 5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the form of reproducible drawings. 6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract documents; quality to be judged by Architect. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of . subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor's expense. 1.08 WARRANTY • A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice. B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year,the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor. C. Warranty period shall begin once all phases of construction are complete. L-0 Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-3 44' Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment. in successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5%to plus 10%as approved in each case. B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper or correct power and fuel-burning characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project. C. Storage and Handling: 1. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 2. Handling: Avoid damage. 3. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. 2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, inserts, supports, etc., of the indicated MSS type and size.The Manufacturers Standardization Society(MSS)of the Valve and Fittings Industry Practice SP-58 and SP- 69 are referenced in this section. B. Manufacturers: B-Line, Carpenter& Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut, Tolco, Erico, or accepted substitute. Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable (or other manufacturers as noted). C. Corrosion Protection: Provide materials which are zinc plated or factory painted to prevent corrosion. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, plastic coated, or by other recognized industry methods. D. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613. Design restraint systems in accordance with "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems,"Second Edition, 1998, SMACNA, or"A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint"ASHRAE RP-812, 1999. E. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig. 260). 2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7(Fig. 97),fabricated from steel. 3. Adjustable Swivel-Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig. 70). 4. Clamp: MSS Type 4(Fig.212, 216). 5. Double-Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3(Fig.295A, 295H), including pipe spacers. 6. Adjustable Saddle-Support: MSS Type 36(Fig. 258)and MSS Type 37 (Fig. 259), including saddle, pipe and reducer. Fabricate base-support from steel pipe and include cast-iron flange or welded-steel plate. 7. Channel Support System: Galvanized, 12 gauge channel and bracket support systems, single or double channel as indicated on the Drawings or as required by piping and equipment weights. Grinnell "Power Strut"channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Super Strut, Globestrut, Bee, Kindorf or Unistrut. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-4 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS F. Vertical Pipe Clamps: 1. Two-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8(Fig. 261). 2. Four-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42 include pipe spacers at inner bolt-holes. G. Hanger Attachment: 1. Hanger Rod: Rolled threads, zinc plated. Right hand threaded. 2. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13(Fig. 230). 3. Weldless Eye-Nut: MSS Type 17(Fig. 290). 4. Malleable Eye-Socket: MSS Type 16(Fig. 110R). 5. Clevises: MSS Type 14 (Fig. 299). H. Building Attachments: 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18(Fig. 282), steel or Grinnell Power-Strut PS349 continuous channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Michigan Hanger, Globestrut, Unistrut, Super Strut. 2. Clamps: MSS Type 19(Fig.285, 281), Type 20, 21 (Fig.225, 226, 131),Type 23(Fig. 86, 87, 88),Type 25(Fig. 227), Type 27 through 30 where applicable. 2.03 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Pipe Markers: 1. Adhesive pipe markers of width, letter size and background color conforming to ANSI A13.1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B946 with arrow banding tape or similar Seaton,Zeston, MSI. B. Nameplates: 1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16"thick, laminated 2-ply plastic, bottom ply white, outer ply black, letters formed by exposing bottom ply. 2. Size: 2"by 4" nameplates with 1/4"high letters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, roughing-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work. °$ B. Utility Locations: The location of existing utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation. C. Sleeves, Inserts, Cast-in-Place Work: Provide sleeves, inserts, anchoring devices, cast- in-place work, etc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule. D. Excavation: All of the fill placed as part of the construction of the building pad and construction road was cement-treated. Depth may be as much as 10 feet. All areas that were cut as part of the construction of the building pad and construction road were cement-treated to a depth of 12 inches. See the Existing Conditions plan; sheet C1.2 for information regarding areas that have been cement-treated. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-5 L,r Pnnted 05/13/13 E. Coordination: SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. The drawings are based on equipment of a certain manufacturer and may be identified as such. Where alternate manufacturers or approved substitutes are incorporated into the work, any required design changes are the responsibility of the contractor. Such changes may include changes in utility or system connection sizes, location, or orientation, service clearances, structural support or acoustic considerations. 2. Prepare accurate AutoCAD shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation for piping and plumbing devices. Submit drawings prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. Provide drawing files to other trades for coordination. 3. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, chases, mountings, backing,foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items. 4. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing • of the mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist. F. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of piping be necessary, provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work. 3.02 UTILITY COORDINATION A. Utility Coordination: Coordinate all aspects of the incoming plumbing utility services indicated with the city engineer, serving utility, and the off-street improvements contractor. Requirements of the utility company which exceed the provisions made on the Drawings or covered by these Specifications shall take precedence. Provisions made on the Drawings or Specifications in excess of the utility company's requirements shall take precedence. No additional compensation will be allowed the contractor for connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utilities. 3.03 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit,float and similar control devices required,with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings. B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment. C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system. D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to determine which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification Sections and provide all others. Protect No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-6 Pnnted 05/13/13 r SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all equipment and comply with Code requirements. B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction,and with a minimum of 7'overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless indicated otherwise, conceal all piping. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all I equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, 1 girders,footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings. C. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by piping, hangers, conduits, etc., provide clear self-adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to)the proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and I equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods. i 3. Support fire sprinkler piping independently of other piping and in accordance with j NFPA Pamphlet 13. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at panel points only. 1- B. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install specified seismic restraints to restrict excessive movement. 2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following installation requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Insulated Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed on all insulated pipe and tubing. c. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-7 ,., Pnnted 05/13/13 SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall determine support type. . e. Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor barrier or where exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple wood insulation shields(Elcen Fig. 216)or steel pipe covering protection shields(MSS type 39)at each hanger. C. Pipe Support: 1. Vertical Spacing: Support at base, at equivalent of every floor height(maximum 10'as required by Code)and just below roof line. 2. Screwed or Welded Steel or Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as follows: Steel Copper 1-1/4"and smaller 7'span 6'span 1-1/2"pipe 9'span 6'span 2"pipe 10'span 10'span 2-1/2"&larger 12'span 10'span 3. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: a. Hubless and Compression Joint: At every other joint except when developed length exceeds 4',then at each joint. b. Additional Support: Provide at each horizontal branch and/or at concentrated loads to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 4. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps, valves, etc,to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 5. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows: Pipe and Tube Size Rod Size Inches mm Inches mm 1/2"to 4" 12.7 to 101.6 3/8" 9.5 5"to 8" 127.0 to 203.2 1/2" 12.7 10"to 12" 254.0 to 304.8 5/8" 15.9 D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets in accordance with MSS SP-69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable. F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights. G. Installation of drilled-in concrete anchors shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions for working load, depth of embedment, and spacing between anchors and from the edge of the slab. Use only wedge style anchors. H. Seismic Restraints: Install restraints where recommended in SMACNA"Seismic Restraint Manual." Show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613 and reference ASCE standard. Seismic restraint system components shall be approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD). Acceptable Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, Mason Industries,Tolco, or approved. Contractor shall submit calculations and shop drawings, sealed and signed by a professional engineer, showing seismic restraint design for all equipment, piping and ductwork required to be braced. Protect No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-8 Punted 05/13/13 • SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.06 PLUMBING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name(abbreviated)as shown/scheduled/specified;except vent and drainage piping. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for marker locations, letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced"signs to identify heat cable wrapped piping. Locate pipe labels in accessible areas as follows: 1. Near each valve, meter, gauge, or control device. 2. Near equipment such as pumps, heat exchangers,water heaters, etc. 3. At piping branch connections. 4. At penetrations(each side)of walls, ceilings, and floors. 5. At access panels and doors. 6. At 25 foot maximum intervals. Provide a minimum of 1 label above each room where lift out ceiling is installed. Reduce intervals in congested areas such as mechanical rooms. B. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic-laminate signs at locations of major equipment such as heat exchangers, pumps, etc. Identify equipment in field same as on drawings. Permanently mount in an appropriate and effective location. 3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete plumbing connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental piping, fittings, trim and labor necessary for a finished working installation. B. Verify the rough-in and finish requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring plumbing connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in. Minimum branch pipe size for fixtures shall be 1/2". 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs. At final completion,thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation. B. Protect floors,walls,framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are conducted with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the plywood. Clean-up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the • Architect, due to the pipe cutting/threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade. 3.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Do all necessary cutting and patching of existing building and yard surfaces required for completion of the mechanical work. Patch to match finish and color of adjacent surfaces. Coordinate work in remodel and new areas to avoid cutting of new finished surfaces. ,, 3.10 MECHANICAL PAINTING A. Minimum Requirements: All mechanical equipment, piping, insulation, etc., exposed in finished areas, storage rooms and other locations except mechanical equipment rooms will be painted. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-9 „4 Pnnted 05/13/13 SECTION 22 05 00 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Painting Materials: Materials shall comply with Division 9 and shall be compatible with the material to be painted. C. Uninsulated Piping: Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping located buried in ground, in concrete or masonry one(1)coat acid-resisting black paint. Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping exposed to weather one(1)coat black asphaltum varnish. D. Iron Work: Paint hangers, rods, anchors, guides, threads of galvanized pipe, bases, supports, uncoated sheet metal and other iron work without factory finish, exposed to weather, one coat acid-resisting black paint. Apply one(1)coat Dixon's Aluminum Graphite No. 209 paint over the(1)coat primer as recommended by paint manufacturer to all hot metal surfaces. E. Piping in Mechanical Room: All insulated and uninsulated piping exposed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be painted. Painting is not required for cast iron, plastic, or glass waste piping, or for stainless steel piping, PEX tubing and soft copper tubing. Contractor shall submit proposed colors for approval. In lieu of painting, insulated piping may be covered with colored PVC insulation jacketing as specified in Section 22 07 00, Plumbing Insulation. F. Insulated Piping and Other Insulated Surfaces: Paint insulated piping in half-round, split tile, or other inaccessible locations, one(1)coat asphalt emulsion. 3.11 PLUMBING WORK CLOSEOUT A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment requiring same. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of leaks, obstructions, or contamination. B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings required in Division 1 as previously specified in this Section. C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work. END OF SECTION Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 05 00-10 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 07 00 I PLUMBING INSULATION SECTION 22 07 00 1 PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of plumbing systems specified elsewhere in these specifications. B. The requirements of Section 22 05 00, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Minimum Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with Chapter 13 provisions of the State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. B. Composite(Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50 and containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant. C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for Fittings): Same as"B"requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 22 05 00, the following apply: 1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic. 2. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation Manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certain Teed, Armstrong, Pabco, lmcoa or Nomaco. Johns Manville products are listed unless indicated otherwise. B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Foster, 3M, Insul-Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 07 00-1 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION 2.02 PIPING INSULATION . A. Pipe Temperatures Minus 30 to 180 Deg. F: Flexible, preformed, pre-slit, self-sealing elastomeric pipe insulation up to 2-1/8"ID, thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU/hr.sq.ft./in. at 75 deg. F and vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms/inch. On cold surfaces, apply in • thickness necessary to prevent condensation on the surface at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Armstrong"Armaflex 2000"or, in concealed locations, Imcoa or Nomaco also approved. B. Exterior Installations: Same as for interior installations except 0.016"aluminum finish jacket. 2.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Equipment Temperatures Below 70 Deg. F: Flexible,closed cell, elastomeric sheet insulation of 5.5#/cubic feet density and 0.27 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Armstrong"Armaflex." B. Equipment Temperatures From 70 to 450 Deg. F: Glass fiber 3 pound density insulation with a 0.23 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Johns Manville"814 Spin-Glas"with "FSK" jacket containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant or finished as recommended by manufacturer. 2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, staples, bands, tapes, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers,welded studs, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer for the insulation and conditions specified. No staples allowed on cold water piping systems. B. Interior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Finished metal jacket or as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation material specified. C. PVC Protective Jacketing and Valve and Pipe Fitting Covers: Johns Manville Zeston 2000, Proto LoSmoke, or Ceel-Co Ceel-Tite 100 Series with precut fitting fiberglass insulation or approved. D. Jacket Lap Sealing Adhesives: Foster Drion 85-75 contact cement or approved substitute. E. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles(MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi(690-kPa)minimum compressive strength, water- rePellent-treated calcium silicate or cellul r -glasspipe insulation, thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 07 00-2 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSULATION A. General: Do not insulate underground piping except at joints and fittings on preinsulated piping unless indicated otherwise. At contractor's option and in accordance with Part 2 of this section, elastomeric insulation may be installed on domestic water piping in thicknesses equivalent to the glass fiber insulation. Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendation with joints and seams completely sealed. B. Refrigerant Piping and Condensate Piping: 1. Insulate with 1"thick insulation. 2. Insulate all piping exposed to outside weather with 1"thickness with weather- proof metal jacket. C. Pipe Fittings: 1. Insulate and finish all fittings including valve bodies, bonnets, unions, flanges and expansion joints with precut fiberglass insulation and preformed PVC covers sealed to adjacent insulation jacket for continuous vapor barrier covering over all fittings. D. Protective Covering: Install continuous protective PVC or metal covering on all piping and fittings in mechanical rooms, accessible tunnels, attic spaces, accessible ceilings, etc., where insulation may be subject to damage. Install with rivets or cement seams and joints. ( E. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following. 1. • Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME 831.9. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 or Type 40 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. - a. Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4(DN100)and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following. a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2(DN8 to DN90): 12 inches(305 mm)long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm)thick. b. NPS 4(DN100): 12 inches (305 mm)long and 0.06 inch(1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6(DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm)long and 0.06 inch(1.52 mm)thick. d. NPS 8 and NPS 14(DN200 and DN350): 24 inches(610 mm)long and 0.075 inch(1.91 mm)thick. e. NPS 16 and NPS 24 (DN400 and DN600): 24 inches (610 mm)long and 0.105 inch(2.67 mm)thick. 4. Pipes NPS 8(DN200)and Larger: Include wood inserts. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. ' L.A Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 07 00-3 L i Punted 05/13/13 SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION F. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and without staples on cold water lines. Where jacket joint and lap seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall or apply lap sealing adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 07 00-4 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide pipe, pipe fittings, piping specialties, pumps and related items required for complete piping system. • B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 22 05 00, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods,also apply to this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: ASTM, and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable. B. Labeling: All piping shall be continuously and legibly labeled on each length as required by codes and standards and including as a minimum, country of origin, manufacturer's identification marking,wall thickness designation, and applicable standards and approvals. Fittings shall be labeled as required by the referenced standard. Tubular . fixture traps shall be stamped with manufacturer's mark and material thickness. C. Potable Water Valves: Potable water piping materials not limited to faucets, mixing valves, or pressure reducing valves. Valves shall meet NSF Standard 61, Section 9,for drinking water faucets and shall be brass construction. Brass components which contact water within the faucet shall be from brass which contains no more than 3 percent lead by dry weight. D. Concealed Plastic Piping: No concealed plastic piping inside the building unless approved by Code or Governing Authorities. E. Definitions: Where piping fluid is not indicated in the following paragraphs, provide similar piping materials for similar fluids(i.e., "make-up water"="domestic water"; "wet stand pipe"="fire sprinkler pipe"; "drainage piping"="sanitary/storm sewer piping"). F. Plumbing System Disinfection shall be performed by an experienced, qualified, chemical treatment agency. Mt. Hood Chemical, Chemcoa, or approved alternate. 1.03 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping,storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data for each product specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: a. Condensate drain. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 2210 00-1 �4 Panted 05/13/13 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING 2. Pipe: ASTM B88. a. Above Ground Domestic Water: Type L hard temper copper with soldered joints. 3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint fittings,ANSI /ASME B16.22. B. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: Refrigerant. -2. Pipe: ASTM B88.Type ACR hard temper copper with soldered joints. Cleaned and sealed at the factory. 3. Refrigerant Fittings: ANSI/ASME 831.5 or SAE J 513-F, "Refrigeration Tube Fittings." Where conflicts occur, B31.5 shall govern. C. Cast Iron DWV Pipe: 1. Application: 1-1/2""and larger. a. Rain drain above and below floor. 2. Pipe: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, CISPI 301-05/ASTM A 888-05. Produced by American manufacturer only. Foreign produced piping is not allowed. 3. Fittings: Hubless cast iron fittings: CISPI 301-05/ASTM A 888-05. 4. Couplings: a. Light Duty: Standard couplings meeting CISPI 310. b. Medium Duty: No-hub couplings meeting CISPI 310 and incorporating ASTM C 564 gasket, type 304 SS corrugated shield and type 304 SS clamping bands. Two clamping bands on 1-1/2"thru 4" pipe and four bands on 6"thru 10" pipe. c. Heavy Duty: No-hub couplings meeting ASTM C 1540, and FM 1680. ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket,type 304 SS corrugated shield and type 304 SS clamping bands. Four bands on 1-1/2"thru 4" pipe and 6 bands on 5"thru 10" pipe. d. Couplings to Dissimilar Pipe in Concealed Locations: Femco"LowFlex" or approved substitute. 5. Manufacturers: Cast iron pipe and fittings—AB&I, Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe, or approved. All pipe shall be labeled by the manufacturer. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS A. Soldering and Brazing Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements. • 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA. 2. Lead-Free Solder: ASTM B32, Grade HB. Harris"Bridgit"approved. 3. Silver Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 96.5TS. 4. Flux:Water soluble paste flux. 5. Brazing filler rod: BCuP rod to suit conditions. B. Sleeve Seal: Rubber-link pipe wall and casing closure. Thunderline Link-Seal. For fire rated wall,floor or ceiling penetrations, 3-M"CP-25"caulk, "No. 303" putty and/or"PSS 7904"sealing system. 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith,Zurn,Wade,Watts, Josam, Mifab, or approved substitute. 2. Types: a. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4472-U, bronze ferrule with raised head bronze plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws. 2.04 REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES A. General: Provide the following equipment where they are not a part of the factory installed equipment accessories. Select equipment for operation with the refrigerant being utilized and for the pressure and temperature conditions indicated. Sporlan,Alco, Henry, Detroit, or as listed for each equipment. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 10 00-2 P"nted 05/13113 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING � I B. Thermostatic Expansion Valve: Capacity matched for the system, angle or straight through pattern external equalizer, brass body complete with capillary and remote it sensing bulb. C. Solenoid Valves: For installation in liquid, suction and/or hot gas circuit as indicated. Brass body, replaceable coil of voltage indicated. D. Liquid and Moisture Indicators: Moisture and liquid indicator installed after the liquid line filter dryer. E. Liquid Line Filter Dryer: Sealed container up to approximately 10 tons of capacity and replaceable desiccant dryer core and strainer on larger capacity systems. F. Charging Valves: Quick coupling type connection with removable valve core. 2.05 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Subbase Materials: A graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag. B. Finely-Graded Subbase Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag, with 100% passing a 3/8"sieve. C. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to the required densities, and complying with AASHTO designation M145, Group A-1,A-2-4, A-2-5. or A-3. 1 D. Stabilization Fabric: Nonwoven stabilization and drainage fabric. Mirafi 140S or 140M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 UTILITY SERVICE A. Plumbing Utility Connections: Complete installation. Contact local serving utilities to determine conditions involved and make or arrange to have connection made at proper time and pay all costs involved. B. Storm Sewers: Connect storm sewers as shown on the Drawings and as required by the serving utility. Verify depth, size and location prior to installation of the new sewer systems. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices and plumbing code standards. Install each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and/or replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. Install piping plumb and level except where pitched for drainage. If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid (concrete or CMU)partitions. C. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Use Type"L" hard drawn copper tubing and make all changes in direction with specified fittings. 2. Lay out the refrigerant piping system in a manner to prevent liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor and so that oil will return to the compressor. Slope all horizontal suction lines toward the compressor. Take special care to keep all tubing clean and dry. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 10 00-3 „ Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING 3. Install all refrigerant piping straight and free from kinks and restrictions, properly supported to minimize vibration. Provide hangers at 5'spacing for 1/2"lines, 6' spacing for 1"lines and 8'spacing for 1-1/2"and larger lines. Submit complete diagram for approval. 4. Comply with the refrigerant piping installation instructions of the refrigeration equipment manufacturer. • 3.03 PIPING JOINTS A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material. B. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5 Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide. C. Cast Iron"No-Hub": All joints in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute(CISPI) Designation No. 310-97"Installation Procedures for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings For Sanitary and Storm Drain,Waste and Vent Piping Applications." Horizontal runs of 5"and greater shall be braced as indicated in Figure 4 for"rodding"restraints. Application of couplings as follows: 1. Light Duty Couplings:All vent piping and all drainage and waste piping above grade. 2. Medium Duty Couplings: All aboveground waste and drainage piping unless indicated otherwise. 3. Heavy Duty Couplings: a. All underground installations. D. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces. E. Line Grades: 1. Drainage Lines: Run at maximum possible grade and in no case less than 1/4" per foot within building. 2. Vents: Pitch for drainage 1/4" per 10'. 3. Water: Pitch to low points and install hose bib drains. 3' minimum depth of ground cover for all lines outside building unless otherwise noted. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted wherever testing is indicated. Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to a uniform firm density. Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6"above wrapped, coated and plastic piping and tanks, and to center line of other tanks (where recommended by tank manufacturer, use"pea gravel"backfill). Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to the required densities. Do not backfill with frozen materials. 3.05 CLEANING A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where necessary. B. Sanitary and Storm Drainage System: 1. Remove construction debris from cleanouts, drains, strainers, baskets, traps, etc., and leave same accessible and operable. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted piping at the end of the day or whenever work stops. 2. Before final acceptance of completed sewer system,flush and clean the entire system with water. Trap and remove solid material obtained from flushing and cleaning from the new system. Do not allow debris to enter the existing sewer system. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 10 00-4 Printed 05/13/13 1 SECTION 22 1000 PLUMBING PIPING 1 3.06 TEST A. General: 1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5%of test pressure. B. Repair: 1. Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly. and re-installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop-leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 2. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. C. Plumbing Waste and Vent Piping: Hydrostatic test by filling to highest point, but not less than 10'water column on major horizontal portion. 3.07 PIPE-INSTALLATION A. Air Conditioning Refrigeration Subcontractor: Submit 5 copies of piping diagram for approval. Install all refrigerant piping, major components and all minor components, such as dehydrator, service valves, etc., and arrange piping for hot gas bypass for low load operation. Test system, evacuate, charge, start-up and adjust. Refer to applicable sections of these Specifications for test, evacuation, etc. B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions. C. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Use Type"L"hard drawn copper tubing and make all changes in direction with specified fittings. 2. Lay out the refrigerant piping system in a manner to prevent liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor and so that oil will return to the compressor. Slope all horizontal suction lines toward the compressor. Take special care to keep all tubing clean and dry. 3. Install all refrigerant piping straight and free from kinks and restrictions, properly supported to minimize vibration. Provide hangers at 5'spacing for 1/2"lines, 6' spacing for 1"lines and 8' spacing for 1-1/2"and larger lines. Submit complete diagram for approval. 4. Comply with the refrigerant piping installation instructions of the refrigeration equipment manufacturer. 3.08 PIPING JOINTS A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material. B. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 10 00-5 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING C. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gasket. D. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces. E. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good installation practice. F. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment. 3.09 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT A. Floor,Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome-plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on all pipe penetrations in finished spaces. B. Filters: Install in a manner to permit access for removal and replacement of filter cartridge. C. Sleeves: At all penetrations of concrete or masonry construction. PVC, 24 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Fabricate sleeves 1"diameter larger than pipe or insulation. PVC and sheet metal sleeves at non-structural penetrations only. D. Sleeve Caulking: Grout insulated pipe with cement mortar or approved waterproof mastic. All caulking or grouting shall extend full depth of sleeve. Install UL sealing caulk, putty and/or system at all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors and ceiling. 3.10 CLEANING A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch-up paint where necessary. B. Refrigeration System Piping: If, for any reason, sanitized and sealed-at-the-mill tubing is not used, clean the tubing as follows: 1. Wipe each tube internally with a dry, lintless cloth followed with a clean lintless cloth saturated with recommended refrigerant. 2. Repeat until the saturated cloth is not discolored by dirt. 3. Wipe with a clean cloth saturated with compressor oil and squeezed dry. 4. Wipe with a dry, lintless cloth. 3.11 TEST A. General: 1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5%of test pressure. B. Repair: Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop-leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 10 00-6 Printed 05/13/13 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING r- C. Refrigerant System: 1. When the refrigerant connections have been completed, close the compressor suction and discharge valves(or receiver outlet valve in the case of condensing unit)and test the balance of the system to near operating pressure with a dry r nitrogen. 2. Carefully test all joints, using soap and water or other sudsing solution. After all joints are tested, discharge the gas and repair all leaks,then repeat the test with a mixture of nitrogen and R-410A and a halide torch or an electronic leak detector. 3. Evacuate the system to remove moisture and non-condensables. Lower the absolute pressure with a vacuum pump to 1000 microns of mercury. Apply external heat as required to vaporize moisture. 4. Dehydrate each refrigerant circuit by satisfactory use of a vacuum pump before charging with refrigerant. Furnish all necessary refrigerant and oil for complete operating charge of the system. Upon completion of the work of construction, test all refrigeration equipment under normal operating conditions and leave in operating order. Adjust automatic temperature controls. 5. After the first 24 hours of operation, measure the pressure drop across the suction filter. If the pressure drop exceeds 5 pounds per square inch, replace the cartridge with a new one, retesting and replacing the cartridge and/or adjusting the system as necessary to achieve a pressure drop of less than 5 pounds per square inch in 24 hours. END OF SECTION t i L Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 22 10 00-7 W Pnnted 05/13/13 7 SECTION 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ( PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Do all work in accordance with regulations of serving electrical utility, telephone utility, National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, National Fire Codes, and other applicable codes. B. Whenever the requirements of the Electrical Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. C. This Contractor is bound by the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and•Division 1 bound herewith in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. D. Bidders shall view the site and shall include all costs incurred by existing conditions in the bid proposal. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be new, of manufacturer's latest design and of the best quality. The materials shall be manufactured in accordance with applicable standards of NEMA,ANSI, or UL and shall be UL listed. B. Complete each system as shown and place in operation except where only rough-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of faults, shorts, or unintentional grounds. C. Protect electrical work,wire and cable, materials and equipment installed under this Division against damage by other trades,weather conditions, or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective. • • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Electrical metallic conduit may be used in dry locations not subject to mechanical injury. Raceways within six feet of the floor in passages, storage areas or where exposed to passing traffic are deemed subject to mechanical injury. B. Non-metallic plastic conduit(PVC)shall be used for power systems underground feeders, including runs under the building slab. Minimum 3/4"trade size. PVC shall not be used inside buildings. C. Flexible metal conduit permitted where fixed into the existing concealed spaces and where flexibility is necessary. Exposed flex shall be jacketed, equal to Seal-Tite, with approved fittings, limited to nominally 18 inches maximum length. D. With the exception of secondary service conduits, all conduits shall be routed overhead and concealed in walls. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 26 00 00-1. Punted 05/06/13 SECTION 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS E. Galvanized Rigid Conduit(GRC)and Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC)shall be used where exposed to weather, or damp location,where subject to mechanical injury. F. GRC and IMC shall be coupled and terminated with threaded fittings. Ends shall be bushed with insulating bushings equal to T&B 1220 or 1230 series. G. Connectors and couplings for EMT shall be steel concrete tight compression type with insulated throats on connectors. Connectors shall have a T&B 5030 and 5040 series insulating bushing. Indent type connectors shall not be used. H. The Contractor shall provide supplemental groypd bus in terminating switch and panelboards, and green ground wire as per code rules,for all PVC runs. I. Provide duct-seal at ends of all underground and under slab conduits. J. All elbows installed in PVC conduit runs shall be long sweep galvanized rigid steel. K. Wire shall be copper, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, No. 12 minimum size for lighting and power uses. Insulation to be type THHN or THWN except where adverse conditions require other insulation type. L. Splices and Terminations: Splices shall utilize wing nut connector installed properly; splices for No. 8 and larger wires shall be made with approved pressure type connectors; all taped joints shall be applied in half-lap layers without stretching to deform. M. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock-out plugs, mounting holes,fixture studs if required. N. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD(heavy duty), quick-make, quick- break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by system voltage and the load served. Approved manufacturer: Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer, G.E. O. All wiring devices and plates to be specification grade. Ivory color. Receptacles: Hubbell 5362 series, Switches: Hubbell 1221 series, Coverplates: Impact resistant plastic, Ivory color. P. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings. Q. Circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable, without disturbing adjacent units, quick- • make, quick-break, ambient compensated, and trip indicating. Provide complete, accurate, typewritten resulting circuit schedules in panel. R. Provide grounding of the electrical system in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code. All raceway systems are to contain a grounding conductor sized in accordance with the NEC. S. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a fixture of the type designated for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have a fixture the same as those used in similar or like locations. Provide lamps for all fixtures. T. Approved lamp manufacturers: General Electric, Osram/Sylvania and Philips. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 26 00 00-2 Pnnted 05/06/13 i 1 SECTION 260000 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Electrical plans are diagrammatic. Verify exact equipment locations for all equipment. l Coordinate with architectural drawings and installations to avoid conflicts ( B. All work shall be installed in a neat, inconspicuous, professional manner. Conduit runs shall parallel structural lines where exposed. 1 C. Support conduits nominally every 6 feet along runs and within 18 inches of terminations, ells and fittings. Outlet boxes,fixtures and equipment shall be securely mounted and supported. c D. The site shall be left clean and free of dirt and debris. Panels,fixtures, outlets and r equipment shall be left clean and free of foreign materials and dirt. j E. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in i operation. If fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the Contractor shall clean them. w F. Fixtures shall be carefully aligned, leveled in straight lines, and located as shown on the i Architectural reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment shall be made by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported and fastened to the ceiling system. i G. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim occupancy sensors in the correct location required for a complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range ( of coverage of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. The contractor shall provide the quantity of sensors necessary to properly and completely cover each room indicated to have occupancy sensing. H. The contractor shall provide power packs as required to accomplish the occupancy t sensing indicated. I. It is the contractor's responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with the manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensor and installation criteria. J. The contractor shall provide, at the Owner's facility, the training to familiarize the Owner's 1 personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem-solving diagnosis of the lighting control equipment and systems E PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee the electrical installation against all defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for one year after the date of acceptance of the work. Defects shall be properly remedied to the satisfaction of the Architect at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 26 00 00-3 ,,,,E Pnnted 05/06/13 f,. SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY / A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade walks pavements lawns and grasses and exterior plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Base course for concrete walks pavements. t 5. Base course for asphalt paving. I 6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench,including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed below the hot-mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying r pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. L F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or . , beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized _, excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. .i G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard j Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-1 i' Pnnted 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586. I. Structures: Buildings,footings,foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits,ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Soil Materials B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. C. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Architect or Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's or Engineer's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups;free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste,frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-2 Pnnte0 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING E. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940;with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No.200 sieve. F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve and at least 50% retained on the No. 16 sieve, such as pit run gravel or sand, or non-plastic soil excavated from the trench.. G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57;with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. H. Trench backfill: 1. Class B backfill shall be used in all other locations where Class A backfill is not designated. Material used for Class B backfill shall be earth, sand, gravel, rock or combination thereof,free of humus, organic matter,vegetable matter,frozen material, clods, sticks, and debris and containing no stones having a dimension greater than three inches. The materials shall predominate in the finer sizes and, in place, shall present no voids and no isolated points or areas of larger stones 1 which would cause fracture or denting of the utility or structure or subject it to undue stress. All Class B backfill shall be placed in 8"lifts and compacted to at least 92%of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor test method(ASTM D 1557). 2. Class A backfill shall be used under paved areas, in trenches parallel to street, other areas subject to wheel traffic, under sidewalk or as designated on the plans. The backfill shall be%inch and less than 8 percent passing the U.S. No. 1 200 sieve. The material shall be free of organic matter and other deleterious materials. Top of rock elevation shall be held down at the specified depth in areas designated to receive asphalt paving. All Class A backfill will be placed in { eight inch lifts and compacted to 92%of the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM Test Method D 1557. Trench backfill located within 1 foot of finished subgrade elevation should be placed and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor test method (ASTM D 1557). 3. Maintenance and Backfill: Notwithstanding the type of backfill placement, the backfilled trench or excavation surface shall be maintained until all construction has been completed and accepted blithe Owner and Engineer. This maintenance shall include but not be limited to the addition of backfill in settled areas and surface rock or pavement in roadways to keep the trench reasonably smooth and free from excessive ruts and potholes. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand;ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67;with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. J. Sand: ASTM C 33;fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-3 Pnnted 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas,oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements,and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section"Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls,which are specified in Division 31 Section"Site Clearing,"during earthwork operations. D. General 1. The rough excavation shall be carried to the necessary depth to obtain the specified depth of subgrade densification shown on the plans. Likewise, on embankments,the depth of subgrade densification shall be as shown on the plans or specified. Should the Contractor, through negligence or other fault, excavate below the designated lines, he shall replace,the excavation with approved materials, in an approved manner and condition, at his own expense. All excavating, moving, placing and depositing of all materials are subject to approval by the Engineer and the Engineer shall determine the suitability of material to be placed in embankments. All materials determined unsuitable shall be disposed of in waste areas or as directed. Topsoil and strippings shall not be used in fills or in subgrades but shall be handled and placed as specified. 2. The Contractor shall inform and satisfy himself as to the character, quantity, and distribution of all material to be excavated. No payment will be made for any excavated material which is used for purposes other than those designated. All spoil areas shall be leveled to a uniform line and section and shall present a neat appearance before project acceptance. 3. If existing pavement areas that will be left in place are damaged due to hauling or to any other activity of the Contractor, they shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense as directed by the Engineer. Those areas outside of the pavement area which are disturbed due to the Contractor's operations shall be restored to their original condition prior to final acceptance of the project. 4. Spillage of excavation materials on paved areas shall be immediately cleaned up by the Contractor. Cleanup shall include brooming and flushing with water, by mechanical means. 5. If it is necessary to interrupt existing surface drainage, sewers or underdrainage, conduits, utilities, or similar underground structures, or parts thereof, the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take all necessary precautions to protect and preserve or provide temporary services. When such facilities are encountered,the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who shall arrange for their removal, if necessary. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, satisfactorily repair all damage to such facilities or structures which may result from any of his operations during the period of the contract. 6. Where remaining ends of abandoned pipes or portions of other items partially removed under this specification would be left exposed, removal shall be carried Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project . 31 20 00-4 Printed 04/30/13 I SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 1 into the slope or below grade to furnish no evidence of their existence in the finish surface. Remaining ends of sewer pipes and conduits shall be capped or plugged in a watertight manner. E. Contractor's responsibility for utility properties and services 1. At points where the Contractor's operation could cause damage or interference to railway,telegraph, telephone, television, power, oil, gas, water, irrigation, or other private, public, or municipal utilities, the Contractor shall suspend work until all arrangements necessary for the protection thereof have been made by the Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall notify all utility offices which are affected by the construction operation at least 48 hours in advance of excavation. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor expose or interrupt any utility without first requesting permission and being granted to do so from the affected agency. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility, once permission from the utility has been granted, to locate, if necessary, and expose all of the existing underground utilities in advance of the trenching operation. 3. The Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible to the Owner and utility companies for any damage, expense, or claims of any kind brought because of injuries, damages or delay which may result from the carrying out of the work to be done under the Contract. 4. In the event of interruption to domestic water or to other utility services as a result of accidental breakage, or as a result of being exposed, unsupported, or a lack of coordination, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer and the agency involved. The Contractor shall cooperate with the said authority in restoration of services as promptly as possible and shall bear any and all costs of repairs. In no case shall interruption of any water or utility service be allowed to exist outside working hours unless prior to approval of the Engineer or agency involved is granted. 5. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the Contractor for damages as a result of the location of the underground utilities being other than that shown on the plans or for the existence of underground utilities not shown on the plans. 3.02 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations,from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 3.03 EXCAVATION,GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-5 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches wide. 3.04 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork,for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.05. EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, • elevations, and subgrades. 3.06 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines,depths, and elevations. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths, minimum 18 inches,to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 6 inches each side of pipe or conduit as indicated. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. D. Field Relocation: During construction, minor relocations of the line may be necessary. Such relocations shall be made only with approval from the Engineer. Unforeseen obstructions encountered as a result of such relocations will not become subject to claims for additional compensation by the Contractor to any greater extent that the original lump sum of the contract or unit price of the utility being installed. E. Opening Trenches: The Contractor shall not begin the trench excavation until the necessary material is on hand to complete the work involved. The trenches shall be opened in accordance with the lines and grades given for the work, at such times and as far in advance of the work as may be required by the Engineer. Not more than a total of 300 feet of trench shall be opened in advance of the competed utility unless authorized by the Engineer. Related structures must be competed and backfilled at the time of line installation. F. Barricades, Guards, and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights, and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during the progress of the work and until it is safe for public use. Watchman or flag personnel shall be provided as necessary. Rules Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-6 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING and regulations of all local and Federal authorities regarding safety provisions shall be observed. The Contractor will be solely responsible for accidents caused by inadequate or insufficient safety provisions. G. Interfering Structures or Roadways: 1. The Contractor shall remove, replace and/or repair any damage done by the { Contractor during construction to fences, buildings, cultivated fields, drainage crossings, and any other properties at his own expense without additional compensation from the Owner. The Contractor shall replace or repair these structures to a condition as good or better than their original condition prior to commencing work in the area. 2. Where paved roadways are cut, backfill will be Class A as defined hereinbefore. New pavement shall be equal or better than the existing paved surface and shall not deviate by more than one-quarter inch from the existing elevations. 3. If the Contractor encounters existing structures which will prevent construction and are not adequately shown on the plans, he shall notify the Engineer before continuing with the work in order that the Engineer may make such field revisions as necessary to avoid conflict wit the existing conditions. The cost of waiting or "downtime"during such field revisions shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner or liability to the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to so notify a conflict of this nature is encountered, but proceed with construction despite this interference, he shall do so at his own risk with no additional payment. H. Shoring and Sheathing:The Contractor shall use whatever means necessary to maintain safe working conditions and protect adjacent property and structures from damage due to ( excavation. The Contractor shall conform to all federal, state, and local regulations governing shoring, sheathing, and excavation. When shoring or sheathing is installed, the trench width shall be increased accordingly. The shoring or sheathing shall remain in place until the utility or structure is backfilled to a point where caving could not damage the installation. No payment will be made for shoring or sheathing. All costs involved in placement and removal of shoring and sheathing shall be considered incidental to the work. 3.07 SUBGRADE INSPECTION ° A. Notify Architect or Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. ( B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices changes in the Work. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-7 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 3.08 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom,without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill,with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.09 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. B. Location of Excavated Materials: During excavation the Contractor shall locate excavated material so as not to block any public right-of-way, traveled roadways, public or private; and unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, roadway shall be kept open to at least on lane of traffic. The Contractor shall store or waste excavated materials only in designated areas unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Utmost care shall be taken to prevent spillage or damage to property adjacent to the project. 3.010 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud,frost, snow, or ice. 3.011 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells,joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil;fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Provide 4-inch-thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway base. E. Place and compact initial backfill of base material satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-8 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 3.012 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer ( before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen, or fcontain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.013 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 95%of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor test method(ASTM D 1557). 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 8 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 95%of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor test method (ASTM D 1557). 3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material to at least 92% of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor test method (ASTM D 1557) below 1 ft from the finished subgrade surface and { 95% in the upper 1 ft. 3.014 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface,free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots,fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/4 inch C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/4 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.015 BASE COURSES A. Place base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Shape base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. Place base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-9 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 3. Place base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness,with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.016 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud,frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 2. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness,with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. . 3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses as shown in plans. 3.017 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq.ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades,fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; re-compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.018 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic,freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and re-compact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-10 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 3.019 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS ( A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 3.020 EASEMENTS A. Where portions of the work located on private property, easements and permits will be obtained by the Owner. Easements shall provide for the use of property for construction purposes to the extent indicated on the easements. Copies of these easements and permits will be available from the Owner for inspection by the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the adequacy of the easement obtained in every case. The Contractor shall confine his construction operations to within the easement limits or street right-of-way limits or make special arrangements with the property owners for the additional area required and notify the Engineer of any such conditions. B. Any damage to private property, either inside or outside the limits of the easements provided by the Owner, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Before final payment will the authorized by the Engineer, the Contractor will be required to furnish the Owner with written releases from property owners where special agreements or easements have been obtained by the Contractor or where the Contractor's operations for any reason, have not been kept within the construction right-of-way obtained by the Owner. Any such special agreements must be in written form and shall not involve the Owner or Engineer as to liabilities in any way. 3.021 FINISHING: A. Work under this specification is to be done after the earthwork has been substantially completed and will involve any or all of the following items of work as may be applicable or pertinent. B. All side slopes in excavation and fills shall be trimmed and shaped as specified herein and shall be made free of all exposed roots and debris and of all stones exceeding two (2)inches in size which are loose or liable to become loosened. Embankments need not { be finished to a fine degree of perfection, but shall be made as smooth, safe and sightly as practicable with the compatibility of materials used in construction of the embankments. If directed by the Engineer, embankment slopes flatter than four to one and constructed of rocky material shall be covered with a layer of earth,talus or other fine material C. In the vicinity of bridge ends, culvert ends, inlets, walls, etc., all extraneous matter shall be removed and the areas shaped and trimmed as directed. All sewers, culverts, drains and their appurtenances constructed under the contract shall be cleaned out. D. All materials removed in connection with the above operations shall be disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. END OF SECTION Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 31 20 00-11 Printed 04/30!13 I SECTION 33 41 00 J STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ` A. This Section includes gravity-flow, non-pressure storm drainage outside the building, with the following components: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Drains. 3. Precast concrete manholes. - i1.3 DEFINITIONS A. PE: Polyethylene plastic. B. PP: Polypropylene plastic. C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Gravity-Flow, Non-pressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water. Pipe joints shall be at least silt-tight, unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Special pipe fittings. 2. Backwater valves. [ 3. Drains. 4. Channel drainage systems. 5. Storage chambers. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. 2. Stormwater Inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames, covers, and grates. 3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames and covers, design calculations, and concrete design-mix report. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. L • B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings,and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3"Piping Applications"Article for applications of pipe,fitting, and joining materials. Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-1 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with tube and fittings. 2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings. 3. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 48: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 4. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings. 5. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings. B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 56 and NPS 60: AASHTO MP7,Type S,with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings. 2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO MP7, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings. 2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150,for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile-iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153,for push-on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets. B. PVC Water-Service Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 pipe, with plain ends ' for solvent-cemented joints with ASTM D 2466;"Schedule 40, socket-type fittings. C. PVC Cellular-Core Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness pipe with ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 , socket-type fittings for solvent- cemented joints. D. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35,,with bell- and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. E. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. F. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, with bell-and-spigot ends; ASTM D 3034 fittings,with bell ends; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. G. A2000 PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F949 2.4 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173,elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling,for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber. 2. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-2 Punted 04/30/13 1 • SECTION 33 41 00 • STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING C. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. D. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. E. Nonpressure-Type Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing-or transition- type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion- resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. • 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping. 2.6 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel,welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Paint: SSPC-Paint 16. B. PE Sheeting 1. Pervious Liners: Meet ASTM D4491: 0.5s"-1 min; D4632:80 lb min; D4833: 35 lb min; D3786: 130 psi min; D4751: 70 US Sieve max. 10 mil min. thickness. Mirafi { 140NL or approved equal (ODOT Type II variation). 2. Impervious Liners: Meet ASTM D4491: 0.01s"-1 min; D4632: 180 lb min;, D4833:80 lb min; D3786: 290 psi min; D4751: 30 US Sieve max. 30 mil min. thickness. AMOCO 1198 or approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. Gy a. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern,flexible or rigid couplings for pipes with different OD. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-3 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING b. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints. B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. C. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: 1. NPS 3: Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 2. NPS 3: NPS 4 PVC sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 6: Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 6: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings in NPS 8 and NPS 10 and corrugated PE pipe and fittings in NPS 12, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 6. NPS 8 to NPS 12: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 7. NPS 8 to NPS 12: PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated,to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated,follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install piping beginning at low point,true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Line and Grades: Survey control hubs for both line and grade will be provided by the Engineer in a manner consistent with accepted practices. The Contractor shall establish line and grade for pipe by the use of lasers or by transferring the cut from the offset stakes to the trench at whatever intervals necessary to maintain the line and grade. The Contractor shall check line and grade as necessary. In the event that the limits prescribed herein are not met, the work shall be immediately stopped, the Engineer notified, and the cause remedied before proceeding further with the work. Variance form the established line and grade shall not be greater than 1/4-inch for grade, and 1/2-inch for line, providing that such variation does not result in a level or reverse-sloping invert. 1. Variation in the invert elevation between adjoining ends of pipe, due to nonconcentricity of joining surface and pipe interior surfaces, shall not exceed 1/64-inch per inch of pipe diameter, or 1/2-inch maximum. 2. Tee stations will be staked by the Engineer to enable the Contractor to install services at proper property location. D. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. E. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-4 Pnnted 04/30/13 I SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING F. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling,jacking, or a combination of both. G. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to CPPA's"Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings." 4. Install PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 5. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 6. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for Utility." Where specific joint construction is not indicated,follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join corrugated PE piping according to CPPA 100 and the following: a. Use silttight couplings for Type 1, silttight joints. b. Use soiltight couplings for Type 2, soiltight joints. 2. Join PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for 1 solvent-cement joints. i 3. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric gasket joints. 4. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric- seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible[or rigid]couplings. # 3.5 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal-type backwater valves in piping where indicated. 3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth per plan detail. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.7 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-5 Ponied 04/30/13 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 3.9 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping,flush with finished surface. C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives,fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer. D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. E. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated. F. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints. G. Embed channel sections in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. 3.10 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Chamber Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install system and backfill according to chamber manufacturer's written instructions. Include storage and leaching chambers,filtering material, and filter mat. B. Piping Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install piping system,filter fabric, and backfill according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 3.11 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains. B. Connect force-main pressure piping to building's storm drainage force mains. Terminate piping where indicated. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. • 3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000,psi, unless otherwise indicated. b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. 4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. C. Connect to sediment interceptors. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-6 Pnnted 04/30/13 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING ( 3.12 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: 1. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below: 1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12 inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.13 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures. 1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 95 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired,for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-7 -i Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. 3.15 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water. END OF SECTION Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 41 00-8 Pnnted 04!30/13 1 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following: 1. Concourse area—Footing Drain 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. ( B. PE: Polyethylene plastic. C. PP: Polypropylene plastic D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. E. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. 2. Solid-wall pipe and fittings. 3. Drainage conduits. 4. Drainage panels. 5. Geotextile filter fabrics. B. Approval of waterproofing manufacturer's service agent for use of drainage panels against and for waterproofing membrane protection. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.2 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: 1. Triple Wall HDPE 4" perforated tubing meeting ASTM F810; Hancor Turf-Flow or l , approved equal with narrow slots 2. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. Fernco or approved equal. B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints. 2.3 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. B. PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for • coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 46 00-1 Pnnted 04/30/13 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell-and-spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 2.5 SOIL MATERIALS A. Backfill, sand, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section"Earth Moving." 2.6 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq.ft.when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament or woven, monofilament or multifilament. 2. Style(s): Flat. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Compare civil drainage drawings and specification with drawings and specification of manufacturer's and other trades on this project. Report any discrepancies between them to the Engineer prior to installation of work. 3.2 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall prepare a recommended work sequence that addresses the project objectives and review with Engineer. Contractor shall receive approval on the proposed work plan prior to start of work. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect downstream storm systems from silt and other materials entering during construction. B. All field drainage equipment is to be turf rated, not to exceed group pressure to disturb the existing landscaping (15psi), storm system, or other underground utilities. 3.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed. B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.5 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section"Earth Moving." 3.6 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. 3.7 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts. 2. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 46 00-2 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE 3.8 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide. B. Place impervious fill on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing and compact to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide after concrete footing forms have been removed. C. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. D. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches. E. DO NOT encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric. F. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation subdrainage. G. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. H. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade. I. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. J. .Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches. 3.9 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. D. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. 3.10 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to t - AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties." B. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties"; or according to ASTM D 2321. C. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. D. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell-and- spigot joints. E. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 46 00-3 Pnnted 04/30/13 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE 3.11 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cleanouts for Subdrainage: 1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches in depth. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular-traffic areas. 3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch above grade. 3.12 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid-wall-piping storm drainage system. 3.13 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. 1. Install PE warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. 3.15 CLEANING A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 33 46 00-4 Pnnted 04/30/13 • SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.02 REINFORCEMENT f A. Reinforcing Steel:ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60(420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished. B. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire:Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers:Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide galvanized or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. ( 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS ( A. Cement:ASTM C150, Type I-Normal or Type II - Moderate Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. { B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates:ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash:ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan:ASTM C618, Class N. E. Silica Fume:ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1. F. Water:Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air Entrainment Admixture:ASTM C260. C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture:ASTM C494/C494M Type G. D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture:ASTM C494/C494M Type F. E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture:ASTM C494/C494M Type E. F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture:ASTM C494/C494M Type D. G. Accelerating Admixture:ASTM C494/C494M Type C. H. Retarding Admixture:ASTM C494/C494M Type B. I. Water Reducing Admixture:ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 1. Shall not increase concrete shrinkage or promote water-bleeding. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs.The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Perm Rating: 0.3 maximum. 2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc.,for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. 3. Products: a. Moistop Ultra 15 manufactured by Fortifiber Corporation:www.fortifiber.com. b. VaporBlock 15 manufactured by Raven Industries:www.vaporblock.com. c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 15-mil (Class A): www.stegoindustries.com. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; PERMINATOR Class A- 15 mils:www.wrmeadows.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00-3 ei Pnnted 5/8/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Sealer: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless;that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Products: a. Ashford Formula; Cure-Hard. b. BASF; Lapidolith. c. Conspec Marketing &Manufacturing Co., Inc.,a Dayton Superior Company; Intraseal. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard. e. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Euco Diamond Hard. f. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.;Seal Hard. g. Meadows,W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard. h. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal. C. Oil and Water Repellent:Water-based concrete protectant, VOC compliant, silane, siloxane and/or synthetic polymers. 1. Products: a. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; Petrotex. b. Prosoco; Consolideck SLX100 Water&Oil Repellent. c. Retroplate; RetroPel 2.06 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Sheet:ASTM C171. Provide one of the following: 1. Curing paper, regular or white. 2. Polyethylene film, clear or white, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in. 3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet,weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd,40 inches wide. B. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for concrete on the basis of field experience, as specified in ACI 301. C. Admixtures:Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 4. Total Air Content: 3 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00-4 Printed 5/8/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lap joints minimum 12 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends with manufacturer's recommended tape. Use vapor retarder sheet to boot around all penetrations and seal with tape to create a continuous vapor retarder. Do not penetrate vapor retarder with screed pins, wood stakes or other items. 1. Fit membrane to all penetrations to within 1/2 inch of the penetration and seal with tape or mastic. 2. Repair all damaged portions of the membrane with tape or with a patch made from the same or compatible material as the membrane, cut so as to provide a minimum 12-inch lap from any opening and taped continuously about its perimeter. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position,support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. E. Ensure reinforcement and board insulation, where applicable will not be disturbed during i concrete placement. F. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 SLAB JOINTING A. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- third of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Engineer. C. Deposit and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 6. Coordinate with Work of Section 11 40 00 - Foodservice Equipment for insulation board to be installed between slabs at freezer. 3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect finished slabs for conformance to specified tolerances. . Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00-5 Pnnted 5/8/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work.Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R,and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Board Insulation: 'Wood float"as described in ACI 302.1 R, 2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings:"Steel trowel"as described in ACI 301.1 R; thin floor coverings include resilient flooring. 3. Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel"as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. 3.08 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. 3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by saturated burlap. a. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. E. Sealer Application: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Sealer: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. b. Do not apply to concrete that is less than three days'old. c. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry.Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. d. Locations of Use:All exposed slabs in cooler and freezer. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00-6 Pnnted 5/8/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Oil and Water Repellent:Apply one uniform coat applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply a second coat within time frame recommended 11 by manufacturer. a. Locations of Use: Over sealer at exposed slabs in cooler and freezer. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Testing and Inspecting:Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. F. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. G. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump:ASTM C143/C143M;one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content:ASTM C231, pressure method,for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature:ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens:ASTM C31/C31 M. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests:ASTM C39/C39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. Protect No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00-7 Pnoted 5/8/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests:Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. H. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness. 3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results:The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch,fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 00-8 Pnnted 5/8/2013 SECTION 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for non-critical applications of concrete and for projects using small quantities of concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing." 6. "Lightweight Concrete." D. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." E. Assume soil bearing capacity of no less than 3,000 psi. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, ..j brand, and source throughout Project, unless otherwise specified on the plans: Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 53-1 Pnnted 04/30/13 SECTION 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd.when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,Type 1, Class A. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows, or as specified on the plans: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 53-2 Punted 04/30/13 i , SECTION 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to I ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, l but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. I 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu.yd. 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating 1 Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. PART 3- EXECUTION 1 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. I 3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint I tape. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and I. supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. i 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. i ° B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, i sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-third of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and 1 , finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. , 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. 6s Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 53-3 Pnnted 04/30/13 SECTION 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. D. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.6 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 53-4 Punted 04/30/13 SECTION 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency tosample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete { placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. 3.9 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION it I..S Project No 13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 03 30 53-5 Printed 04/30/13 SECTION 0610 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 0610 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Roof-mounted curbs. C. Preservative treated wood materials. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AFPA(WFCM)-Wood Frame Construction Manual for One-and Two-Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association. B. ASTM Al 53/A153M-Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood;American Wood Protection Association. D. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce). E. WCLIB(GR)-Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17;West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. F. WWPA G-5-Western Lumber Grading Rules;Western Wood Products Association. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber:Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch or Douglas Fir, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency:Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee(www.alsc.org)and who provides grading service I for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency:West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). B. Grading Agency:Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). C. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. D. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. E. Stud Framing: 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch or Douglas Fir. 2. Grade: No. 2. F. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. .Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 06 10 00- 1 Printed 5/8/2013 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel,sized to suit framing conditions. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 -Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade:AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing or flashing. c. Treat lumber in contact with concrete. d. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible;clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb;support headers on cripple studs. 3.03 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane(Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 0610 00-2 Pnnted 5/8/2013 l SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.05 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal:Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or"waste-to-energy"facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. ( END OF SECTION • . i_1 I J Project No.13013 Tigard-Tualatin School District May 2013 Fowler MS Cooler/Freezer Replacement Project 0610 00-3 Printed 5/8/2013